ScanTools Plus User's Guide

®
®
ScanTools Plus
User’s Guide
Publication Number 203 583 133

Copyright © 2008-2009 Scantron Corporation. All rights reserved. Use permitted only
under license. Printed in the United States of America. www.scantron.com
5000i, DOSSIER, EZData, Image ScanTools, iNAME, iNSIGHT, OpScan, OpScan

iNSIGHT, PrintFlex, RealTime OCR, ScanFlex, ScanTools, Scantron DesignExpert,
SelfScore, Sentry, Scantron and the logo are trademarks, in the U.S. and/or other
countries, of Scantron Corporation.
Adaptec and USB2connect are trademarks of Adaptec, Inc.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United

States and/or other countries.
Belkin is a registered trademark of Belkin Corporation.
Citrix and MetaFrame are registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. in the United
States.
D-Link and DUB-C2 are registered trademarks of D-Link Systems, Inc.
Internet Explorer, Microsoft, Visual C++, Visual Studio, Vista, and Windows are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
SIIG is a registered trademark of SIIG, Inc.
SPSS is a registered trademark and SPSS/PC+ is a trademark of SPSS, Inc.
ii ScanTools Plus
READ ME FIRST!
It is important that you read and are familiar with the following
parts of this User's Guide BEFORE installing and operating
ScanTools® Plus software. This User's Guide is a basic overview of
ScanTools Plus software. Use online help to find details of the
functionality of the software.
System Requirements
Located in the Overview. Before you start, be sure that you have the right
hardware and software on your system.
Upgrading/Migrating Applications from Earlier

Versions of ScanTools Software
Located in the Overview. If you are currently using an earlier version of
ScanTools software—ScanTools (DOS environment), ScanTools (16-bit
Microsoft® Windows® environment), ScanTools II, Image ScanTools™,
or ScanTools Plus—be sure to review the upgrade instructions and
considerations before you start. This is especially important if you plan to
migrate your applications to the new software version.
Registering the Software

Located in the Overview. You should register ScanTools Plus software
online. Online registration is required for timely notification of
downloadable updates and upgrades, and to perform the download
operation.
Using Online Help

Located in the Overview. Online help can be very useful and may
eliminate the need for a call to Scantron Customer Support. If you do not
User’s Guide iii
know how to use online help, read this description and try it out on your
system.
Training
To ensure optimal use and to receive complete support, Scantron offers
training on ScanTools Plus. Visit our Web site at www.scantron.com or
call 1-800-336-3426, extension 6123.
Calling for Help

Located in the Overview. If this User's Guide or online help does not
have the answer to your question or problem, go to this description of
how to get help.
iv ScanTools Plus
T
Table of Contents
READ ME FIRST! iii
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Upgrading/Migrating Applications from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Software. . . iii
Registering the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Using Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Calling for Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Preface xvii
Document Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Internet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
User’s Guide v
Chapter 1:
Overview 1
OMR Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Image Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
User Exits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Capabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Calling for Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Outside the U.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Within the U.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Support Web Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Services Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Registering the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Outside the U.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Within the U.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Online Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Using Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Explorer View Help Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Help Text Pane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Printing Online Help Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Upgrading from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Upgrading from ScanTools Plus Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Upgrading from an Earlier Version of ScanTools Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
vi ScanTools Plus
Migrating Applications from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Software . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Copy Application Files for Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Migrating from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Migrating from Image ScanTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Migrating from ScanTools II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Migrating from ScanTools (16-bit, Windows 3.x or later environment) . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Migrating from ScanTools - DOS environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
iNAME Image Archiving Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
iNAME Merge Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Image Enable Disable Utility Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
RealTime OCR Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
User Exit Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Chapter 2:
Installation and Configuration 33
Before You Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Installing ScanTools Plus Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Removing (Uninstalling) ScanTools Plus Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
ScanTools Plus Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Scanner Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Paths for Applications, Profiles, and Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Confirmations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Chapter 3:
Modify/Create an Application 63
Task Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Modifying an Existing Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Creating a New Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
User’s Guide vii

Parts of an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Document Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Features of a Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Output Format Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Application Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Creating a ScanTools Plus Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Start ScanTools Plus Application Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Open an Existing ScanTools Plus Application for Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Select Application Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Select or Create a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Import a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Select or Create an Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Define Output Fields and Append Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Select Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Release for Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Close ScanTools Plus Application Module Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Making an Application Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Installing an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Deleting an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Chapter 4:
How to Scan Documents 97
Task Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Parts of the ScanTools Plus Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Configuring the Context. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

The File Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
The Scanning Options Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
viii ScanTools Plus

Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Scanner Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Edit Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Edit Correction Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Chapter 5:
Editing Data 109
Task Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Modify an Existing Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Create a New Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Editing a Data File Using an Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Manually Edit a Data File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Modifying an Existing Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Using the Mouse to Display Fields in Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Changing Edit Profile Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Creating a New Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Creating a Copy of an Edit Profile for use with the Same Application . . . . . . . . . . 118
Post-Scan Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Selecting Edit Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Selecting the Application, Data File, and Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Starting the Edit Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Making Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Manually Editing Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Selecting the Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Using the Modify Data File Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
User’s Guide ix
Chapter 6:
Scoring Data 127
Task Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Modify an Existing Score Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Create a New Score Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Score During Scanning (Online Scoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Score an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Scoring). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Score Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
The Score Profile Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Modify or Create a Score Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Create a Copy of a Score Profile for use with the Same Application . . . . . . . . . . 135
Changing Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Scoring an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Scoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Chapter 7:
Converting Data 139
Task Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Modify an Existing Conversion Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Create a New Conversion Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Convert During Scanning (Online Converting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Convert an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Converting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Conversion Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Output Formats for Converted Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Delimited ASCII (.DLM, .TXT, or .CSV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
x ScanTools Plus
Fixed Length Records (.SDF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
SPSS for Windows (.SPS and .DA1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
DOSSIER (.DSA or .DSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
IBM 3881 (.ASC or .EBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Y2K Compliant (.Y2K). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
The Conversion Profile Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Modify or Create a Conversion Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Create a Copy of a Conversion Profile for use with the Same Application . . . . . . . 151
Changing Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Converting an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Converting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Chapter 8:
Archiving Images 155
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
iNAME Scan-Time Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Application Definition for iNAME Scan-Time Archiving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
iNAME Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Application Definition for iNAME Merge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Starting iNAME Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Post-Scan Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Application Definition for Post-Scan Archiving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Starting Post-Scan Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
User’s Guide xi
Chapter 9:
ScanFlex Option 169
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Scanner Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
ScanFlex Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
ScanFlex Alignment Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Forms Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Printing Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
ScanFlex/PrintFlex Guarantee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Chapter 10:
User Exits 179
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Appendix A:
Tutorial: Creating an Application
for an Image Scanner 183
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Form #223022 General Purpose Answer Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
801 Sample Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
xii ScanTools Plus

Creating a New Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Creating a New Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Step 1: Checking Image Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Step 2: Creating the New Document and Adding the Background Form Image. . . . . 190
Creating the Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Saving the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Selecting Document Image Format Settings in the Image Clips Window. . . . . . . . 197
Defining a Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Defining a Grid Using the Background Form Image Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Associating a Grid with a Field using the Append Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Defining a Grid Using the Outline Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Step 1: Outlining the Grid Region and Scanning the Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Step 2: Defining a Grid Using the Outline Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Step 3: Restoring the 223022.tif Background Form Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Defining the Clip Region for a Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Setting Clip Attributes for Post-Scan Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Defining a Date Field and the Associated Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Defining a Single Clip Region for Multiple Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Review of Field and Grid Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Defining and Using a Translate Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Step 1: Defining a Translate Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Step 2: Using a Translate Table When Defining a Field and Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
User’s Guide xiii

Defining Linked Grids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Defining a Clip Region for Linked Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Defining Grids Using Copy and Paste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Step 1: Defining the Two Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Step 2: Defining the Two Grids That Will Be Copied: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Step 3: Copying and Pasting Grids to Other Positions and to Multiple Fields. . . . . . 240
Defining a “Comments” Field and Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Step 1: Defining the Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Step 2: Defining the Grid and Selecting the Clip Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Defining a Score Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Releasing for Scanning and Saving the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
If You Need More Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Appendix B:
for an OMR Scanner 253
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
General Purpose Answer Sheet No. 221681. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Preparing the 701 Sample Application as a Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Step 1: Selecting the 701 Sample Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Step 2: Migrating the 701 Sample Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Step 3: Selecting the Correct Document within the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Step 4: Adding the Background Form Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Creating a New Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
xiv ScanTools Plus

Creating a New Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Step 1: Checking Image Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Step 2: Creating the New Document and Adding the Background Form Image. . . . . 266
Creating the Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Saving the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Defining a Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Defining a Grid Using the Background Form Image Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Associating a Grid with a Field using the Append Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Defining a Grid Using the Corners Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Step 1: Defining the Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Step 2: Setting the Design Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Step 3: Marking the Grid Region and Scanning a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Step 4: Defining a Grid Using the Corners Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Step 5: Restoring the 2216811.tif and 2216812.tif Background Form Images . . . . . . . 286
Defining a Date Field and the Associated Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Defining and Using a Translate Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Step 1: Defining a Translate Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Step 2: Using a Translate Table When Defining a Field and Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Defining Linked Grids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Defining Grids Using Copy and Paste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Step 1: Defining the Items Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Step 2: Defining the Grid That Will Be Copied:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Step 3: Copying and Pasting a Grid to Other Positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Step 4: Defining Grids on the Bottom Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Defining a Score Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
User’s Guide xv
Releasing for Scanning and Saving the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
If You Need More Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Appendix C:
Data File Format 309
Appendix D:
Glossary 311
xvi ScanTools Plus

P
Preface
The purpose of this User's Guide is to help you install and
operate ScanTools Plus software. The User's Guide makes
the following assumptions:
• You know how to use a personal computer.

• You are familiar with the Microsoft Windows
operating system.
• The computer you are using meets the system
requirements.
• You have read the relevant manuals for your Scantron
OpScan iNSIGHT™, 5000i ®, OpScan®,
iNSIGHT™, or EZData® scanner.
User’s Guide xvii

Preface
Document Organization
The ScanTools Plus User's Guide consists of the
following:
Chapter 1, Overview provides an overview and a

description of the principle features of ScanTools Plus
software.
Chapter 2, Installation and Configuration describes

how to install and configure ScanTools Plus software.
Chapter 3, Modify/Create an Application describes

how to create (define) an application by using the
ScanTools Plus Application Module.
Chapter 4, How to Scan Documents describes how to

scan documents.
Chapter 5, Editing Data describes edit profiles and the

editing process.
Appendix 6, Scoring Data describes score profiles and

the scoring process.
Chapter 7, Converting Data describes conversion

profiles and how to convert standard ScanTools Plus data
files into other data formats.
Chapter 8, Archiving Images describes archiving image

files.
Chapter 9, ScanFlex Option provides a brief summary

of the optional ScanFlex™ module.
Chapter 10, User Exits provides a brief summary of user

exits.
Appendix A, Tutorial: Creating an Application for an

Image Scanner is a tutorial to help you learn how to use
xviii ScanTools Plus

Document Organization
the ScanTools Plus Application Module with Image

scanners.
Appendix B, Tutorial: Creating an Application for an

OMR Scanner is a tutorial to help you learn how to use
the ScanTools Plus Application Module with OMR
scanners.
Appendix C, Data File Format describes the structure

of a ScanTools Plus data file (.DAT).
Appendix D, Glossary is a Glossary that defines terms

common to ScanTools Plus software and scanning.
The Index provides an alphabetic listing of topics

contained in this manual.
User’s Guide xix

Preface
Internet Access
We invite you to visit our Web site at www.scantron.com.
xx ScanTools Plus
1
In this chapter:
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3
Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 11
Calling for Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 12
Support Web Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 14
Registering the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 16
Using Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 17
Upgrading from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Software
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 22
Migrating Applications from Earlier Versions of
ScanTools Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 25
Chapter 1:
Overview
ScanTools Plus software runs under Microsoft Windows.
It resides on a host computer attached to a Scantron
scanner. It supports both OMR and Image technology
scanners.
OMR Scanners
OMR scanners process Optical Mark Recognition (OMR)
forms. The source data is recorded on each form by filling
in small circles (sometimes referred to as bubbles or ovals)
with a pencil or pen. The marked forms are organized and
placed in a scanner. Then the ScanTools Plus Scanning
Module starts the scanning process. The scanner detects
the marks as they pass under the read head and sends data
to ScanTools Plus software regarding the position and
darkness of each mark on the form.
User’s Guide 1
Chapter 1: Overview
Image Scanners
Image scanners capture an image of the form as it passes
through the read head of the scanner. OMR data is created
from the scanned image in one of two ways, depending on
the scanner model and/or user selection in the ScanTools
application definition:
• OMR from Scanner - OMR data is created in the

scanner and sent to ScanTools software in ASCII
format. This method is optional for Scantron OpScan
iNSIGHT 2/4 scanners with the imaging feature.
• OMR from Image - OMR data is created from the
scanned image that is stored in the buffer in the
memory of the personal computer attached to the
scanner; the image is accessed by ScanTools software.
This method is always used when the configured
scanner is a Scantron OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150,
5000i, iNSIGHT 20, or iNSIGHT 30. It is optional
for OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 scanners with the imaging
feature.
For image scanners, in addition to the OMR data:
• All or part of the form image can also be transmitted

to the host computer for use during data editing and
for image archiving.
• An optional ScanFlex module can be purchased and
used to scan plain paper, laser-printed forms that
contain form ID marks and timing marks.
• An optional RealTime Character Recognition module
can be purchased and used to scan and recognize
machine printed and hand printed text.
2 ScanTools Plus
Chapter 1: Overview
System Requirements
System Requirements
To install and run ScanTools Plus software, you must have
the proper computer hardware and operating system. If
you attempt to install ScanTools Plus software on an
unsupported operating system, you receive an error
message and are unable to install. The requirements are
different depending on which scanner you are using, and
what action you are performing.
To install or uninstall ScanTools Plus the user must have

Administrator Rights.
Scanners PC Hardware Operating Systems

OpScan iNSIGHT™ 70 Pentium® processor: 3.2 GHz, Windows Vista® Business
OpScan iNSIGHT 150 minimum Edition or greater, 32-bit
System memory: 512 MB minimum Edition only.
5000i® with speed
upgrade (Windows Vista requires 512 MB Windows® XP Professional
minimum, 1GB recommended) SP2 or SP3
Hard drive space: 650 MB of free
space, minimum (1GB All Windows hotfixes for the
recommended). The required space service pack must also be
may increase depending on the installed.
application's data storage
requirements.
Video Adapter with 24-bit color
(recommended), 65K colors minimum
Monitor at 1024 x 768 or higher
resolution
CD-ROM drive (for installation)
Ethernet Adapter 10/100/1000 Mbps
recommended
User’s Guide 3
Chapter 1: Overview
System Requirements

iNSIGHT 20 Pentium processor: 3.2 GHz, Windows Vista Business
iNSIGHT 30 minimum Edition or greater, 32-bit
System memory: of 512 MB Edition only.
minimum (Windows Vista requires 512 Windows XP Professional
MB minimum, 1GB recommended) SP2 or SP3
Hard drive space: 650 MB of free
space, minimum (1GB All Windows hotfixes for the
recommended). The required space service pack must also be
may increase depending on the installed.
requirements.
resolution
Ethernet Adapter 10/100/1000 Mbps
recommended
USB 2.0 connection
5000i Pentium processor: 3.2 GHz Windows XP Professional

minimum SP2 or SP3
System memory : 512 MB
Hard drive space: 650 MB of free All Windows hotfixes for the
space, minimum (1GB service pack must also be
recommended). The required space installed.
may increase depending on the
requirements.
resolution
CD-ROM drive for installation
Ethernet Adapter 10/100 Mbps,
recommended
4 ScanTools Plus
Chapter 1: Overview
System Requirements

OpScan iNSIGHT 2 Pentium processor: 866 MHz, Windows Vista Business
with Imaging minimum Edition or greater, 32-bit
OpScan iNSIGHT 4 System memory: 384 MB minimum, Edition only.
with Imaging 512 MB recommended (Windows Windows XP Professional
Vista requires 512 MB, 1GB SP2 or SP3
recommended)
requirements.
resolution
recommended
RS-232 connection - OMR
processing
USB 2.0 connection - Image or OMR
processing
If using a USB 2.0 Add-on card:
Must use one of the following cards
with the driver provided by the card
vendor:
• Adaptec™ - USB2connect™
4000A, the driver depends on
Windows system used:
– Windows XP - do not install the
Adaptec driver, use the
Microsoft driver v5.1.26 dated
6/1/02 (default USB driver). If
the Adaptec USB driver is
installed, remove it.
• Belkin®
– F5U222 USB 2.0 PCMCIA
adapter
– F5U219 USB 2.0 PCI adapter
• D-Link® - DUB-C2® - USB 2.0
Cardbus™ Adapter with driver
v1.0 (not supported with Windows
Vista)
• SIIG® JU-PCM222 - USB 2.0 PCI
User’s Guide 5
Chapter 1: Overview
System Requirements

OpScan iNSIGHT 2 Same as OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 with Windows Vista Business
(OMR Only) Imaging (above) with the exception Edition or greater, 32-bit
OpScan iNSIGHT 4 below: Edition only.
(OMR Only) Minimum USB 1.1, recommend USB Windows XP Professional
2.0 - OMR processing SP2 or SP3
RS-232 - OMR processing
All Windows hotfixes for the
service pack must also be
installed.
OpScan 2 Pentium processor: 866 MHz, Windows Vista Business

OpScan 3 minimum Edition or greater, 32-bit
System memory: 384 MB minimum, Edition only.
OpScan 4/4U
512 MB recommended.(Windows Windows XP Professional
OpScan 5/6 Vista requires 512 MB, 1GB SP2 or SP3
OpScan 7/8 recommended)
OpScan 9010M/9020M Hard drive space: 650 MB of free All Windows hotfixes for the
requirements.
resolution
recommended
RS232 connection or USB 1.1 or 2.0
connection (Keyspan USB Serial
Adapter recommended, if needed)
OpScan 10 Same as OpScan 2/3/4/4U/5/6/7/8/ Windows Vista Business

OpScan 15 9010M/9020M with the exception Edition or greater, 32-bit
below: Edition only.
OpScan 21
USB connection Windows XP Professional
SP2 or SP3
All Windows hotfixes for the

service pack must also be
installed.
6 ScanTools Plus
Chapter 1: Overview
System Requirements

EZData® Pentium processor: 866 MHz, Windows Vista Business
minimum Edition or greater, 32-bit
System memory: 384 MB minimum, Edition only.
512 MB recommended. (Windows Windows XP Professional
Vista requires 512 MB, 1GB SP2 or SP3
recommended)
requirements.
resolution
recommended
RS232 connection or USB 1.1 or 2.0
connection (Keyspan USB Serial
Adapter recommended, if needed)
Terminal Server/Citrix® environment is supported for these scanners:
OpScan 2/iNSIGHT 2 For additional PC hardware Terminal Server 2003 /

(OMR Only) requirements, see reference above Windows Server™ 2003.
OpScan 3 for your scanner model.
OpScan 4/4U/iNSIGHT 4 RS-232 connection required for Citrix MetaFrame 1.8 /
(OMR Only) scanners supported. Windows Server 2003 -
OpScan 5/6 All scanners must be the same SPEFR3.
model and configured identically.
OpScan 7/8
EZData All Windows hotfixes for
the service pack must also
be installed.
User’s Guide 7
Chapter 1: Overview
System Requirements
System Notes
• The Fast User Switching function of Windows Vista
and Windows XP is not supported by ScanTools Plus.
Only one instance of ScanTools Plus can be running
on a PC at one time, even when under separate user
accounts using Fast User Switching.
• We recommend an Internet connection and a web
browser for accessing online product registration,
support information, and product updates. It is not
required for product operation.
• Internet Explorer® v4.0 or greater is required for
access to online help. Access to the Internet is not
required. If you do not have Internet Explorer, you
can download it from the Microsoft Web site
(www.microsoft.com).
• 5000i with speed upgrade and OpScan iNSIGHT 70/
150 scanners with Windows Vista Business Edition
must have the most recent version of the iPORT
scanner drivers (v2.2.1) installed before the 5000i/
OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150 Utility Software and
ScanTools Plus can be installed and run.
• To download the iPORT scanner drivers, access:
http://www.scantron.com
• Follow the installation instructions in the iPORT

Install.pdf file to install the iPORT drivers. This file
can be found on the Pleora Technologies iPORT
Drivers CD if you are installing from the CD. If you
downloaded the drivers from the web link listed
above, the iPORT Install.pdf file will be one of the
files that were downloaded.
• 5000i and OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150 scanners must
have the most recent version of the 5000i/OpScan
iNSIGHT 70/150 Utility Software (version 06.80000)
installed before ScanTools Plus can be installed and
run. See the 5000i/OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150 Utility
Software Release Notes for installation before
installing ScanTools Plus.
8 ScanTools Plus
Chapter 1: Overview
System Requirements
• iNSIGHT 20 scanners must have the iNSIGHT 20

Drivers and Scanner Utilities (version 1.10010)
run. See the iNSIGHT 20 and iNSIGHT 30 Drivers
and Scanner Utilities Release Notes for installation
before installing ScanTools Plus.
• iNSIGHT 30 scanners must have the iNSIGHT 30
Drivers and Scanner Utilities (version 1.10010)
run. See the iNSIGHT 20 and iNSIGHT 30 Drivers
and Scanner Utilities Release Notes for installation
before installing ScanTools Plus.
• OpScan 10, 15 and 21 scanners with Windows Vista
must have the most recent version of the OpScan 10/
15/21 System Files (v02.40000) installed before
ScanTools Plus can be installed and run. See the
OpScan 10/15/21 System Files Release Notes for
installation before installing ScanTools Plus.
• The OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 scanner USB driver is
installed during ScanTools Plus software installation.
• OpScan 2, 3, 4, and 4U scanners with the SelfScore®
option are supported.
• OpScan iNSIGHT 2 and 4 scanners with the
SelfScore option are supported, using a RS232
connection.
User Exits
For any User Exit work, you must use a compiler that can
create Windows Dynamic Link Libraries (DLLs).
Scantron has developed and tested user exits using the
following development platforms:
• Microsoft Visual Studio® .NET 2005 - Microsoft

Visual C++®.NET.
• Microsoft Visual Studio .NET 2003 - Microsoft Visual
C++.NET.
• Microsoft Visual Studio v6.0, Service Pack 6 -
Microsoft Visual C++.
User’s Guide 9
Chapter 1: Overview
System Requirements
User Exits written for ScanTools II version 1.3 (and later)

and Image ScanTools version 5.0 (and later) will run with
ScanTools Plus. User Exits written for earlier versions of
ScanTools software will require rework.
10 ScanTools Plus
Chapter 1: Overview
Capabilities
Capabilities
ScanTools Plus software supports:
• Scantron OpScan iNSIGHT, 5000i, iNSIGHT,
OpScan, and EZData scanners for application
development and scanning
• Use of existing ScanTools applications and profiles
• Online editing, edit correction, file conversion, and
scoring
• Post-scan editing, edit correction, scoring, image
archiving, and file conversion
• Scan-time archiving using iNAME™
• The ScanFlex option. It allows scanning of plain
paper, laser-printed forms with form ID marks and
timing marks, only on image scanners.
• The RealTime Character Recognition option. It allows
scanning and recognition of machine printed and hand
printed text, only on image scanners.
• Command-line entry/context file invocation
• The Download Plus Utility for OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4
and OpScan scanners equipped with Download
firmware for OMR applications. See the scanner
Download firmware documentation and online help
for more information.
The following output format types can no longer be

defined when creating or modifying conversion profiles. If
you have existing conversion profiles with these types, you
may still run them:
• DIF
• Fixed-80 file conversion format (available in DOS
ScanTools software)
• Sheet Compile
• SPSS/PC+
• StatPac Gold
User’s Guide 11
Chapter 1: Overview
Calling for Help
Calling for Help

Outside the U.S.
Contact your local sales agent for support.
Within the U.S.

As a new licensee of ScanTools Plus software, you will
receive one year of Software Subscription Service which
provides new software releases including all updates and
upgrades. Additionally, you will receive telephone support
and access to our Web-based support at
www.scantron.com, which contains valuable software
information and documentation. Continued renewal of
your support agreement ensures that you stay up-to-date,
and use the latest software features, while maintaining
fixed budget costs.
IMPORTANT: Services no longer under warranty or covered
under a support agreement may be billable. The
customer support representative will inform you if
you require a billable service.
When you have questions that are not answered by this

manual or by the online help system, call Scantron
Customer Support. Your support begins on the date of
shipment and is available from 8:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M.
Monday through Friday, customer’s local time (except for
Alaska and Hawaii which is through 7:00 P.M. CST).
Customer support is not available on Scantron holidays.
Before calling Scantron Customer Support, follow the

steps listed below:
1. Check this manual, online help, and the support web

site, www.scantron.com, for the answer to your
question. If you can't find the answer, continue to
step 2.
2. Record the sequence of steps leading to the problem.
12 ScanTools Plus
Chapter 1: Overview
Calling for Help
3. Record the text of all error messages encountered.
4. Have your 9-digit software Serial Number available; it

is displayed in the About ScanTools Plus dialog in
the Help menu.
5. Be available at the scanning system.
6. Call Scantron Customer Support at 1-800-338-5544.
When you call Customer Support, an operator will first

ask you to describe the problem; then the operator will
connect you to a Scantron Customer Support analyst. If
the analyst is not available, he or she will call you back,
normally within one hour.
User’s Guide 13
Chapter 1: Overview
Support Web Site
Support Web Site

Connecting
If you have Internet access and an installed Internet
browser, there are several ways to access the Scantron
Customer Support Web Site:
• Select Support on the Internet on the Help menu of

the ScanTools Plus software main window.
• Use Start | Settings | Control Panel | Add/
Remove Programs | ScanTools Plus | Click here
for support information to navigate to the Support
Info dialog.
• Use your installed Internet browser to navigate to
www.scantron.com.
Services Available
The Support Web Site gives you access to the following:
Outside the U.S.

• Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) with answers
about ScanTools Plus software and other scanning
hardware and software products.
Within the U.S.

• Online registration of your ScanTools Plus software so
that you can be notified of the availability of updates
and upgrades.
• Frequently asked questions (FAQs) with answers
about ScanTools Plus software and other scanning
hardware and software products.
• ScanTools Plus software updates and upgrades that
you can download if you have an active Software
Subscription Support agreement. Non-downloaded
software release distribution may incur a fee.
• ScanTools Plus documentation and manuals.
14 ScanTools Plus
Chapter 1: Overview
Support Web Site
• Scantron Online Store offering a wide variety of

standard OMR scannable forms and supply items to
optimize your scanning investment.
• Training course information: syllabus, schedule, and
online registration.
User’s Guide 15
Chapter 1: Overview

Outside the U.S.
Contact your local sales agent for for product support,
registration, and update information..
Within the U.S.

Software registration ensures timely notification of
downloadable updates and upgrades which are provided
to you as a benefit of an active Software Subscription
Support agreement.
Online registration is required for:
• Notification of downloadable updates and upgrades.

• Downloading of the updates and upgrades.
NOTE: Non-downloaded software release distribution may
incur a fee.
Online Registration
1. Select Support on the Internet from the ScanTools
Plus Help menu, or, if desired, go directly to the
Scantron Web site at www.scantron.com.
2. Select Support > Product Registration. The

product registration page will appear.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to register your
product.
16 ScanTools Plus
Chapter 1: Overview
Using Online Help
Using Online Help

ScanTools Plus online help contains information about
each dialog box and other information needed to use the
product. To access online help, use one of these methods:
• Press F1 from any screen or dialog box to display

information about that screen or dialog box. The
information about the dialog box may be linked to
related topics and information; for example, press F1
while the ScanTools Plus main window is displayed to
show online help for this screen.
• Click Help on the menu bar and select Contents to
display the online help system for ScanTools Plus
software.
NOTE: Internet Explorer is required for access to the online

help system provided with ScanTools Plus software.
Internet access is not required.
User’s Guide 17
Chapter 1: Overview
Using Online Help
Explorer View Help Pane

The left side of the online help display is the Explorer
View Help. The four tabs of the Explorer View Help
window are Contents, Index, Search, and Favorites.
These appear to the left of the topic pane so that you
never lose your place.
Contents
Click the Contents tab to browse through topics by
category. There are a number of books; each book
contains individual help topics. From this dialog box, you
can do the following:
• To open a book, click the plus sign ( + ) next to the

book or just double-click the book. All individual
topics in the book are displayed in a list.
• To display a topic, click or double-click the topic.
• To print an individual topic, select the topic, then click
the Print button.
• To print whole sections, click on the desired book in
the help contents. Then click on the Print button on
the menu bar. You will be given the option of printing
just the selected topic, or the heading and all
subtopics.
Index
Click the Index tab to display a list of index entries. To
find a particular topic, either type a word you are looking
for or scroll through the list.
Search
Click the Search tab to search for keywords that may be
contained in a help topic. To find topics that contain a
word, enter the word in the text box near the top of the
Search tab, then click List Topics. A list of topic titles
containing the word you typed in will appear in the list
box. Double click on a topic title to display a topic. You
can also select a topic title and then click the Display
button to display a topic.
18 ScanTools Plus
Chapter 1: Overview
Using Online Help
NOTE: If you type in a word that is not a valid keyword, you

will get a message that says, “Help cannot search for
that phrase.” Correct this by selecting a valid keyword.
The keywords you searched for will be highlighted if

search highlighting is on. You can toggle search
highlighting on and off by clicking Options on the menu
bar and selecting Search Highlight On/Search
Highlight Off.
You can also search for multiple keywords. To do this,

simply type the words in the text box near the top of the
Search tab and click List Topics. The Help System will
return a list of topic titles containing all of the keywords
you entered.
If you type in a word that is not a keyword, the Help

System will disregard it and complete the search using the
valid keywords you entered.
Boolean operators can also be used. Use the words “and,”

“or,” and/or “not” with the keywords you enter to better
define your searches.
Favorites
Use the Favorites tab to create a list of your favorite
topics. Begin by finding the topic using any of the above
three methods (contents, index, or search). Once you find
a topic you would like to add to your favorites list, select it,
then click the Favorites tab. The topic title will display in
the “Current topic:” text box at the bottom of the screen.
Click the Add button to add the topic to your favorites
list.
To display a topic listed in your favorites list, click the

Favorites tab, select the topic title, and then click the
Display button (or simply double click the topic title). To
remove a topic title from the list, select the topic title, and
then click the Remove button.
User’s Guide 19
Chapter 1: Overview
Using Online Help
Help Text Pane

The right side of the online help display is the Help Text
window. It displays the Help text for the currently selected
Help topic.
You can resize the proportion of the Explorer View

Help pane to the Help Text pane by selecting and
dragging the line separating the two parts of the help
window.
Buttons
There are four buttons available at the top of the main
Help window. These buttons are described below.
Click the Hide and Show buttons to toggle between

hiding and showing the Explorer View Help pane.
Click the Back button to go to the previous topic you

viewed.
Click the Print button to print the help topic to your

printer.
Clicking the Options button yields the following menu

selections:
• Hide/Show Tabs: Toggles between hiding and

showing the Explorer View Help pane.
• Back: Takes you to the previous topic you viewed.
• Forward: After using the Back function, Forward
takes you back through the steps you came from.
• Home: Takes you to the Scantron Customer Support
website.
• Stop: After double clicking a topic title, you can use
the Stop button to stop the request for the page. (This
is most commonly used when the topic is being
delivered via the Internet and there is a delay in the
page appearing.)
20 ScanTools Plus
Chapter 1: Overview
Using Online Help
• Refresh: Refreshes the current topic.

• Internet Options: Gives you access to your current
Windows Internet settings.
• Print: Prints the current help topic to your printer.
• Search Highlight Off/On: Toggles between hiding
and showing highlights on the word(s) used in the
current search.
Links
Within the topic window are words that appear in green
underline; these are links to other topics. Place your cursor
over the green underlined words and the cursor changes
to a hand shape. Click the left mouse button to display the
new information.
Printing Online Help Topics

To print a help topic: From the Contents, Index, or
Search tabs, select the desired help topic, then click the
Print button on the menu bar.
To print a whole section: From the Contents tab, select

the desired heading (book), then click the Print button on
the menu bar. You will be given the option of printing the
selected topic, or printing the heading with all subtopics.
Select the latter to print the whole section.
User’s Guide 21
Chapter 1: Overview

This section provides an overview on upgrading from
earlier versions of ScanTools and ScanTools Plus software.
NOTE: If you are installing ScanTools for the first time,
proceed to Chapter 2 for instructions on installation
and configuration.
Upgrading from ScanTools Plus Software

If ScanTools Plus software is already on your system, you
must first remove the existing version before installing the
new version.
NOTE: When installing ScanTools Plus v7.20010, the default
installation path has been changed from “\Pearson
NCS” to “\Scantron.” If you choose to install
ScanTools Plus to the new default folder, you will
need to copy your ScanTools applications (including
all profiles, background form images, and user exit
programs) to the new folder.
NOTE: ScanTools Plus software version 7.1 or greater and
the utility software do not support Windows 2000. If
you are using Windows 2000, do NOT uninstall your
previous version of ScanTools and the utility software.
NOTE: ScanTools Plus software version 6.3 or greater and
the utility software do not support Windows NT. If
you are using Windows NT, do NOT uninstall your
previous version of ScanTools and the utility software.
Refer to “Removing ScanTools Plus Software” and

“Installing ScanTools Plus Software” in Chapter 2.
IMPORTANT: Before you begin installation, be sure you back
up your existing ScanTools Plus applications, profiles,
data files, and clip files.
22 ScanTools Plus
Chapter 1: Overview
Upgrading from an Earlier Version of ScanTools

Software
If an earlier version of ScanTools software (ScanTools -
DOS environment, ScanTools - 16-bit Windows
environment, ScanTools II, or Image ScanTools) is already
on your system, you have two ways to install the new
software version. You can either choose to remove the
existing version before installing the new version; or, you
can choose to keep the existing version while installing the
new version to a different directory.
Option 1: Remove the Earlier Version of ScanTools Software

1. Before you begin the installation, be sure you backup
your existing ScanTools applications, profiles, data
files, background form image files, and clip files.
The backup is important because most files are no

longer usable with the earlier version of ScanTools
after they have been migrated to ScanTools Plus.
2. Remove the existing version of ScanTools software.

Refer to “Removing ScanTools Plus Software” in
Chapter 2.
3. Install ScanTools Plus software. Refer to “Installing

ScanTools Plus Software” in Chapter 2.
4. Migrate your applications, as needed, to ScanTools

Plus software. Refer to “Migrating Applications from
Earlier Versions of ScanTools Software” in this
chapter.
Option 2: Keep the Installation of the Earlier Version of
ScanTools Software
1. Before you begin the installation, be sure you backup
your existing ScanTools applications, profiles, data
files, background form image files, and clip files.
User’s Guide 23
Chapter 1: Overview
The backup is important because most files are no

longer usable with the earlier version of ScanTools
after they have been migrated to ScanTools Plus.
2. Install ScanTools Plus software. Refer to “Installing

ScanTools Plus Software” in Chapter 2. Be sure to
install ScanTools Plus software to a different directory
than the one used for the earlier version of ScanTools
software you plan to keep. For example:
Keep your ScanTools II installation in C:\Program

Files\NCS Pearson\ ScanTools II\…
Install ScanTools Plus in C:\Program

Files\Scantron\ScanTools Plus\…
3. Copy the existing applications and associated files that

you wish to migrate from the old directory to the new
ScanTools Plus directory. Be sure to keep the existing
ScanTools applications, profiles, data files, and clip
files in the old directory.
WARNING: Do NOT point to the existing files in the old
directory from ScanTools Plus when you open the
application files to migrate them.
4. Migrate your applications, as needed, to ScanTools

Plus. Refer to “Migrating Applications from Earlier
Versions of ScanTools Software” in this chapter.
After you have determined your approach, see Chapter 2

to learn about installation and configuration.
24 ScanTools Plus
Chapter 1: Overview
Migrating Applications from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Software
Migrating Applications from Earlier Versions of ScanTools

Software
This section provides an overview on migrating
applications from earlier versions of ScanTools software.
Applications, data files, and profiles created and saved in

earlier versions of ScanTools software can usually be
migrated to ScanTools Plus version 7.2. Migration rules
depend on the ScanTools software version you are
migrating from. Before proceeding, be sure to check the
requirements for your ScanTools software version and
make backup copies of each application and profile you
plan to migrate.
CAUTION: Be sure to back up all applications and profiles
before migrating.
Copy Application Files for Migration

If you are migrating to a new version of ScanTools
software, we recommend that you prepare as follows:
In the version of ScanTools software you are migrating

from, use Make Application Disk to copy all files
associated with your applications to a specified directory
location. Be sure to include background form image files
if you are migrating from Image ScanTools.
In ScanTools Plus software, use Install Application to

copy all files associated with these same applications.
Migrating from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Plus

Applications, profiles, and data files created and saved in
ScanTools Plus software (versions 6.0 - 7.1) are
compatible with ScanTools Plus software version 7.2.
User’s Guide 25
Chapter 1: Overview
Backward Compatibility
Data Files • Data files saved or created in 7.1 or greater are no

longer backward compatible.
Applications CAUTION: Once saved in the newer format, the applications
remain backward compatible to the same earlier
version of ScanTools software, providing the
following features are not being used within the
ScanTools definition file:
• Grayboxes using absolute units of measurement
(inches or millimeters) to specify the size and location
of evaluate and clip regions. (Cell/TM or Hybrid units
of measurement are acceptable.)
• Software bar codes.
If you have selected features (other than what is listed
above) or performed operations in ScanTools version
7.0, 7.1, or 7.2 that were not available in the earlier
version, they will simply be unavailable.
• Profiles are backward compatible to ScanTools Plus

software (version 6.0 - 7.1) providing new features
have not been used.
Migrating from Image ScanTools

Image ScanTools software (version 4.2 or later) are
compatible with ScanTools Plus software version 7.2, with
one possible exception:
Background Form Image File Paths: If you are using

background form images in your Image ScanTools
application, you may need to update the location of the
background form image files:
26 ScanTools Plus
Chapter 1: Overview
• If you copy your application, the paths to these files

may no longer exist or may have changed. In
ScanTools Plus, you must open the application and
update the paths, as needed, from the Select
Document/Add Images dialog.
• If you install your application, ScanTools Plus will
search for the background form image files in the
directory defined in the Select Document/Add
Images dialog. If the files are found, the paths are not
updated. If they are not found, it will search the
directory where ScanTools Plus.exe is stored. If the
files are found there, it will update the directory
path(s) in the Select Document/Add Images dialog.
We recommend that you open the application, verify
the paths, and then update them, as needed, from the
Select Document/Add Images dialog. See Installing
an Application in online help.
Otherwise, no migration actions are required, although
you will have the option of specifying the scanner light
source via the Set Light Source dialog the first time you
open the application.

Applications • CAUTION: Once saved in the newer format, the
applications remain backward compatible to the same
earlier version of ScanTools software, provided the
(inches or millimeters) to specify the size and
location of evaluate and clip regions. (Cell/TM or
Hybrid units of measurement are acceptable.)
User’s Guide 27
Chapter 1: Overview
• If you have selected functions or performed

operations in ScanTools 7.0, 7.1, or 7.2 (or greater)
that were not available in the earlier version, they will
simply be unavailable.
• You may need to reset the paths to your background
form images, if you use them, in the Select
Document/Add Images dialog.
• Profiles are backward compatible to Image ScanTools
software (version 5.0 or later) providing new features
have not been used.
Migrating from ScanTools II

ScanTools II software (version 1.0 and later) are
completely compatible with ScanTools Plus version 7.2.
They require no migration actions although you will have
the option of specifying the scanner light source via the
Set Light Source dialog the first time you open the
application.

Applications • CAUTION: Once saved in the newer format, the
applications remain backward compatible to the same
earlier version of ScanTools software, provided the
(inches or millimeters) to specify the size and
location of evaluate and clip regions. (Cell/TM or
Hybrid units of measurement are acceptable.)
28 ScanTools Plus
Chapter 1: Overview
• If you have selected features or performed operations

in ScanTools version 7.0, 7.1, or 7.2 that were not
available in the earlier version, they will simply be
unavailable.
• Profiles are backward compatible to ScanTools II
software providing new features have not been used.
Migrating from ScanTools (16-bit, Windows 3.x or

later environment)
You can use applications, profiles, and data files that were
created in ScanTools (16-bit, Windows 3.x or later
environment) version 1.2 or later. When you open the
application or an associated profile from this earlier
version, the Application Migration Options dialog box
will be displayed. You must decide whether or not to save
it in the newer 32-bit ScanTools format. Once saved in the
newer format, the file cannot be used in ScanTools
software (16-bit Windows environment).
See online help for information about how Light Source,

Read Parameters, Mark Threshold, and Discrimination
Margin settings are affected in this migration.
There is no backward compatibility. Applications and
profiles saved with ScanTools Plus version 7.1 or greater
cannot be used in previous versions of ScanTools (16-bit
Windows environment).
NOTE: Sample Application 701 was created in the 16-bit,
Windows version of ScanTools to demonstrate
application migration.
Migrating from ScanTools - DOS environment

You can use applications, profiles, and data files that were
created in ScanTools (DOS environment) software
version 2.5b or later. When you open the application or an
associated profile from this earlier version, the
Application Migration Options dialog box will be
User’s Guide 29
Chapter 1: Overview
displayed. You must decide whether or not to save it in the

newer ScanTools format. Once saved in the newer format,
the file cannot be used in ScanTools software (DOS or
16-bit Windows environments).
See online help for information about how Light Source,

Read Parameters, Mark Threshold, and Discrimination
Margin settings are affected in this migration.
There is no backward compatibility. Applications and
profiles saved with ScanTools Plus version 7.1 cannot be
used in ScanTools (DOS or 16-bit Windows
environments).
iNAME Image Archiving Migration

Before using iNAME scan-time image archiving with an
application created in an earlier version of ScanTools
software (DOS or 16-bit Windows), the application must
be saved (migrated) in ScanTools Plus format.
If you are running an existing ScanTools application with

iNAME image archiving, we recommend you update your
iNAME implementation to take advantage of the ease of
operation provided by the new, integrated interface. See
online help for information about how to do this.
iNAME Merge Migration

Existing applications using the iNAME Merge
functionality will run the same as in your previous version
of ScanTools software. However, you may need to update
the location of the background form image files. The
paths to these files are stored in the application, so if the
directory no longer exists or you move the application to a
different directory when you migrate to ScanTools Plus,
you must open the application and then update the paths
from the Select Document/Add Images dialog.
iNAME image archiving, including the iNAME Merge

function, is integrated with ScanTools Plus software. If
30 ScanTools Plus
Chapter 1: Overview
you are running an existing iNAME image archiving

application, we recommend you update your iNAME
implementation to take advantage of the ease of operation
provided by the integrated interface.
Image Enable Disable Utility Migration

See online help for information about how the Image
Enable Disable Utility affects migration.
RealTime OCR Migration

See RealTime Character Recognition documentation for
information about continuing to use RealTime OCR™
and about migrating to RealTime Character Recognition.
User Exit Migration

See online help for information about how User Exits are
affected by migration.
If you are using an earlier version of ScanTools software

with User Exits and you want to migrate to the current
version of ScanTools, you may have some rework to
perform. The table below provides a general description
of what you will have to do for this migration from each
of the earlier versions of ScanTools.
Current ScanTools Version Version Level User Exit Migration Route

ScanTools
(DOS environment) All versions Rewrite all User Exits.
ScanTools Port User Exits from 16-bit to 32-bit and

(16-bit, Windows environment All versions recompile.
ScanTools II 1.0 - 1.2 Port to the new shell and recompile is

recommended. May not be required,
depending on User Exit calls being
used. See the Rebuilding User Exits
topic in online help for additional
details.
ScanTools II 1.3 No changes required.
User’s Guide 31
Chapter 1: Overview
Current ScanTools Version Version Level User Exit Migration Route

Image ScanTools 1.0 - 4.2 Port to the new shell and recompile is
required. See the Rebuilding User Exits
topic in online help for additional
details.
Image ScanTools 5.0 - 5.2 No changes required.
ScanTools Plus All versions No changes required.
32 ScanTools Plus
2
In this chapter:
Before You Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 34
Installing ScanTools Plus Software. . . . . . . . . . . page 35
Removing (Uninstalling) ScanTools Plus Software
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 49
ScanTools Plus Configuration Settings . . . . . . . page 52
Chapter 2:
Installation and Configuration
This chapter describes how to install, remove, and
configure ScanTools Plus software. If you experience any
problems during the installation, do the following:
1. Record the sequence of steps leading to the problem.

2. Record all error messages encountered.
3. Have your 9-digit software Serial Number available. It
is printed on the CD sleeve and back cover of this
manual.
4. Be available at the scanning system and call Scantron
Customer Support at 1-800-338-5544. An operator
will ask you to describe your problem and then will
connect you to a Scantron Customer Support analyst.
If the analyst is unavailable, he or she will call you
back, normally within one hour.
NOTE: The RealTime Character Recognition optional
component must be installed separately.
User’s Guide 33
Chapter 2: Installation and Configuration
Before You Install
Before You Install

Before you install, make sure your system meets the
requirements listed earlier in System Requirements,
including any Service Packs and hotfixes. If you attempt to
install ScanTools Plus software on an unsupported
operating system, you receive an error message and are
unable to install. Also, review the upgrading information
discussed in Chapter 1. This installation procedure applies
to all operating systems. Where appropriate, the specific
operating system is named.
NOTE: You must have Administrator rights to INSTALL or
REMOVE ScanTools Plus software.
Before proceeding, note the following:
• Backup. If upgrading, be sure you back up your
existing ScanTools applications, profiles, and data files
before you begin the installation.
• Exit all other application programs before installing
ScanTools Plus software.
• If ScanTools Plus software is already installed on your
system (the same version or a previous version), you
must first remove the existing version. Refer to the
Remove procedures later in this section. If you do not
remove it, you will be prompted to do so when you
attempt to install.
• Auto-Start. Make sure that the Auto-Start feature of
your CD-ROM drive is enabled, or run setup.exe on
the CD.
• License Key. You will be entering a special
14-character, alphanumeric License Key to install
ScanTools Plus software. The License Key is used for
installation and the 9-digit Serial Number is used when
you call Scantron Customer Support. Do NOT use
the Serial Number during the installation procedure.
A label containing the License Key, Serial Number,
and product name is displayed on the CD sleeve and
the back cover of this manual. The Serial Number also
is displayed in the About Box of the Help menu.
To distinguish the numeral zero (0) from the letter O,
the numeral zero will have a dot printed in the middle.
34 ScanTools Plus
Installing ScanTools Plus Software

1. Insert the ScanTools Plus software CD into the CD-
ROM drive. The software installation will start auto-
matically. Follow the on-screen installation directions.
The InstallShield Wizard dialog box is displayed
immediately followed by the Welcome screen:
User’s Guide 35
Click Next >.
36 ScanTools Plus
2. The License Agreement dialog box is displayed.
To continue installing, you must select “I accept the

terms of the license agreement”. Use the scroll bar
to read the entire text of the license agreement, and/or
use the Print button to print a copy of it.
Click Next >.
User’s Guide 37
3. The Customer Information dialog box is displayed.
Enter your User Name, Company Name, and License

Key in the appropriate text boxes. This information is
required for software installation.
NOTE: License Key: DO NOT ENTER THE 9-DIGIT
SERIAL NUMBER. Enter the 14-character,
alphanumeric License Key located on the CD
sleeve and the back cover of this manual. To help
you distinguish the numeral zero (0) from the
letter O, the numeral zero will have a dot printed
in the middle.
Click Next >.
38 ScanTools Plus
4. The Registration Confirmation screen is displayed.
Check your registration information again. If

necessary, click No to return to the previous screen
for re-entering any incorrect data.
Click Yes to continue.
User’s Guide 39
5. The Select Components dialog box is displayed.
The software components differ according to the

variant of ScanTools Plus software you purchased.
The variant description is displayed at the top of this
screen; Scan Only has the fewest choices,
Application Development has more choices,
Application Development with Scoring has the
most choices. If needed, use the scroll bar on the right
side to view all components available for installation.
Select any optional components you need by checking

the box to the left of its name. Do not uncheck the
Scanning Module; it is required. You can also
remove one or more of the optional components by
clicking on a component that is already checked.
40 ScanTools Plus
NOTE: The optional Download Plus utility software

component is only used with OpScan iNSIGHT
2/4 and OpScan scanners equipped with
Download firmware. See the Download Utility User's
Guide that comes with these scanners for more
information.
6. The Destination Folder indicates the default path

where the ScanTools Plus program will reside. If you
want a different destination folder for the program
files, click Browse to display the Choose Folder
dialog box.
Enter the new path in the Path text box (default is

currently displayed) or click the desired folder in the
“Directories” window. Click OK to return to the
previous Select Components dialog box.
7. Space Required and Space Available are displayed

below the Destination Folder indicating how much
User’s Guide 41
disk space is required and how much is available. Click

the Disk Space button to see how much space is
available on a different drive. The Available Disk
Space dialog box is displayed.
Select a different Drive and the Space Available and

Space Required fields are automatically updated.
Click OK to return to the Select Components dialog
box. The drive that was last selected in the Available
Disk Space dialog box is used in the Select
Components dialog box.
When the component list and the Destination Folder

on the Select Components dialog box are correct,
click Next >.
42 ScanTools Plus
8. If you chose to install one or more of the User Exit

Shell Module options, the Select Directory dialog is
displayed for each, in turn.
Navigate to the User Exit Wizard directory for each

module; this should be the directory where Microsoft
C++ Visual Studio and .NET will expect to find their
wizards, normally:
• Microsoft Visual Studio\Msdevxx\bin\Ide

where xx is the Visual Studio software version
• Microsoft Visual Studio .NET xxxx\Vc7
where xxxx is the .NET software version
• Microsoft Visual Studio 8\VC
User’s Guide 43
Click OK.
9. The Add Desktop and Quick Launch Icons dialog

box is displayed.
Select which shortcuts you want installed along with

the ScanTools Plus software. You may select all items.
Desktop installs a program icon on the Windows
desktop; Quick Launch installs a program icon on
the Quick Launch toolbar of the Windows taskbar.
Click Next >.
44 ScanTools Plus
10. The Select Program Folder is displayed.
Scantron is the default folder name. If you will be

working from a different program folder, type the
program folder name in the text box or highlight a
folder name in the Existing Folders window.
Click Next >.
User’s Guide 45
11. The setup program will begin copying files. The Setup
Status progress screen is displayed during the
installation.
46 ScanTools Plus
12. After all program files are installed, the Registration

information dialog box is displayed.
You should register online after installation. Online

registration is required for timely notification of
downloadable updates and upgrades, and to perform
the download operation. For details, see “Registering
the Software” on page 16.
Click OK.
User’s Guide 47
13. The InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box for

ScanTools Plus is displayed.
Select the actions you want to occur immediately after

installation. “Launch ScanTools Plus” and “Yes, I
want to view the ReadMe file now” are both
selected by default.
You can view it at any time using the Windows Start |
Programs menu. It is available under the ScanTools
Plus program. We recommend you read the file before
you begin using the software.
Click Finish to complete the installation process.
48 ScanTools Plus

To remove ScanTools Plus software from your system, use
the steps listed below. User created items such as data files,
profiles, applications, and directories will not be deleted.
NOTE: The RealTime Character Recognition optional
component must be removed separately.
The illustrations below are intended to represent the

various steps. The precise look of your operating system
may appear slightly different.
1. To begin the uninstall process, select the appropriate

command from the following:
• (Windows XP) click Start | Control Panel | Add

or Remove Programs
• (Windows Vista) click Start | Control Panel |
Programs and Features
User’s Guide 49
2. The Add/Remove Programs window is displayed

for Windows XP systems.
The Programs and Features window is displayed for

Windows Vista systems.
Select ScanTools Plus from the program list, then

click the Remove (Windows XP) or the Uninstall
(Windows Vista) button.
50 ScanTools Plus
3. A dialog box stating that ScanTools Plus is preparing

the InstallShield Wizard is displayed followed by the
ScanTools Plus Setup confirmation screen.
Click Yes.
4. The Setup Status screen is displayed, followed by the
Uninstall Complete screen.
Click Finish.
5. The Add/Remove Program (Windows XP) or

Programs and Features (Windows Vista) window is
displayed. Verify that the ScanTools Plus program has
been removed and then close the window.
User’s Guide 51
ScanTools Plus Configuration Settings

Before you can start scanning documents, you need to
specify the following in ScanTools Plus software: the
scanner configuration, the directory paths to the
applications, profiles, data files, and what actions will
require confirmation.
NOTE: Do NOT attempt to run any of the ScanTools Plus
functions until you have completed the following
setup procedures:
1. Make sure the scanner is properly connected to the

personal computer.
2. Write down the following information for future

reference:
• The scanner model.

• Whether or not the scanner has a transport
printer, select stacker, or a hardware bar code
reader installed.
• For OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 and OpScan scanners
using an RS-232 connection, note the serial com-
munication information (i.e., COM port on the
PC, baud rate, data bits, stop bits, parity). This
information is not needed for the OpScan
iNSIGHT 70/150, 5000i, OpScan 10/15/21,
iNSIGHT 20, iNSIGHT 30, or OpScan
iNSIGHT 2/4 with Imaging scanners. EZData
scanners are auto-detected and do not require
scanner configuration.
3. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar and

choose Programs.
4. Select the Scantron > ScanTools Plus entry. The

ScanTools Plus main window is displayed.
52 ScanTools Plus
In the following sample main window, the Configure

menu is activated. You will be using the Scanner
Configuration, Paths, and Confirmations options on
this menu.
Scanner Configuration
1. From the Configure menu, click Scanner Configu-
ration. The Scanner Configuration dialog box is dis-
played. This dialog box displays differently depending
on which scanner model is selected (see below).
NOTE: The dialog boxes displayed below are examples
only. For example, the Scanner Model in the dialog
box for OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150, 5000i, and
OpScan 10/15/21 scanners shows a 5000i. The
options will be the same for the OpScan
iNSIGHT 70/150 and OpScan 10/15/21
scanners.
User’s Guide 53
OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150, 5000i, and OpScan 10/15/21 Scanners
54 ScanTools Plus
iNSIGHT 20 and iNSIGHT 30 Scanners
User’s Guide 55
OpScan iNSIGHT 2 with Imaging Scanners
56 ScanTools Plus
OpScan iNSIGHT 4 with Imaging Scanners
User’s Guide 57
OpScan 2/3/5/6/7/8/9010/9020 and OpScan iNSIGHT 2 (OMR

only) Scanners
58 ScanTools Plus
OpScan 4/4U/iNSIGHT 4 (OMR only) Scanners
User’s Guide 59
EZData Scanners
2. For OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150, 5000i, and OpScan

10/15/21 scanners, select any optional scanner
configuration information.
3. For other scanners, click Auto Configure to

automatically determine the Communications
parameters and then change individual parameters
(manually) if required. You should still double-check
the items for Transport Printer, Select Stacker, and
Write Operations Log, as Auto Configure does not
handle these.
4. For ScanTools Plus software to keep a log of scanner

operations, select the Write Operations Log check
box. The operations log is written to operate.log, an
ASCII file located in the Data Files directory at the
end of each batch scanned. The data files directory is
defined in the Paths dialog box shown below; by
default, this is in the C:\Program
Files\Scantron\ScanTools Plus\Data Files
60 ScanTools Plus
directory. You can view the log at any time with a text
editor.
5. Click OK.
Paths for Applications, Profiles, and Data Files

1. From the Configure menu, select Paths. The Paths
dialog box is displayed.
2. This dialog box points to the directories where your

ScanTools applications, profiles, data files, and index
files for image archiving are stored. Initially after
installation, the paths displayed are based on the
installation location. Use the Browse button if you
need to navigate to a different location where the files
reside.
User’s Guide 61
Confirmations
From the Configure menu, select Confirmations. The
Confirmations dialog box is displayed.
NOTE: The Confirmations dialog box can be accessed

from the Configure menu of the ScanTools Plus main
window or the Options menu of the Application
Module.
Confirmations are used when a ScanTools Plus action is

initiated. ScanTools Plus software presents a message box
verifying that the user really wants to perform the action.
Use this dialog box to select the items for which you want
a verification dialog box to be displayed. This is a safety
feature to help prevent accidental erasure or overwriting
of files.
See online help for more detailed information about the

items in this dialog box.
62 ScanTools Plus
3
In this chapter:
Task Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 64
Parts of an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 67
Creating a ScanTools Plus Application . . . . . . . page 81
Making an Application Disk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 90
Installing an Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 93
Deleting an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 95
Chapter 3:
Modify/Create an Application
This chapter describes how to modify or create a
ScanTools Plus application using the ScanTools Plus
Application Module.
User’s Guide 63
Chapter 3: Modify/Create an Application
Task Summary
Task Summary
This section briefly describes how to modify an existing
ScanTools Plus application and how to create a new
ScanTools Plus application. Subsequent sections in this
chapter provide additional details.
Modifying an Existing Application

1. From the ScanTools Plus Application menu, choose
Select and then select the application you want to
modify.
2. From the Application menu, select Open.
3. Make required modifications to the application.
4. From the Application menu, select Settings. These

settings apply to all documents in the application.
Ensure that the Release for scanning option is
checked (enabled).
The remaining settings (options) are mostly for image
scanners and apply to all documents in the application.
5. Save the ScanTools Plus application, using Save or

Save As (a different name).
6. Exit the ScanTools Plus Application Module window.
Creating a New Application

1. Select New from the ScanTools Plus application
menu.
2. From the Application menu, select Settings. These

settings apply to all documents in the application.
Most settings are for image scanners and apply to all
documents in the application.
3. Define the new document:
• Select New from the Document menu.
64 ScanTools Plus
Task Summary
• Name the new document.

• If you have a .tif file of the background form
image, add it to the document using the Add All
Images button; timing marks and form ID marks
will be automatically defined from the background
image. If you do not have the background .tif file,
scan the sample sheets to define the timing marks
and form ID marks; if you use an image scanner, a
grayscale image of the sheet is also displayed and
saved. If no scanner is attached, manually enter the
number of timing marks and the form ID mark
locations.
NOTE: Documents that are scanned by EZData
scanners will also register bias bar values in
addition to Form ID Marks and Timing Marks.
NOTE: If you have a background .tif file that was not
supplied by the form vendor, it may be suitable for
application definition, but might not be suitable
for image archiving or post-scan editing.
• Add Skew Mark locations if the document has

skew marks printed on it.
• Add Image Scanner Options if required.
• Click OK.
NOTE: Importing a document is another way of creating
an application. See the details of importing later in
this chapter.
4. Create a new output format.
5. Create output field(s).
6. Define grids and fields.

NOTE: If you are scoring, refer to the “Modify or Create
a Score Profile” section before completing the
Document Record definition.
User’s Guide 65
Task Summary
7. Select Options from the Options menu to define

other parameters associated with the application.
8. Ensure that the Release for scanning option is

checked (enabled) in Application Settings.
9. Save the ScanTools Plus application (provide

application title and unique 3-digit number). To avoid
unexpected loss of input, we recommend that you
save your application at various times during the
application creation process.
10. Close the ScanTools Plus Application Module

window.
NOTE: If an application is modified, all profiles
associated with that application must be deleted
and new profiles developed.
66 ScanTools Plus
Parts of an Application
A ScanTools Plus application is a set of rules that governs
how your computer collects data from your scanner and
how it stores this information on your disk. The
Application Module enables you to create or modify
applications.
Each ScanTools Plus application contains one or more

document definitions and one or more output formats.
• A document definition describes the location of data

items on each form in the document.
• An output format defines the arrangement of a
document's data items when they are written to a data
file.
• A record format specifies how fields and character
constants are arranged as part of a record.
• A document sequence definition describes the
order in which the documents can be scanned.
User’s Guide 67
Document Definition
A document is one or more sheets that together contain
the data for one document record. A document with
more than one sheet is called a booklet.
Sheet 4
A Document Can Be
Sheet 3
Sheet 2
Sheet 1
or
A Sheet A Booklet
(Made up of
many sheets)
Features of a Form
Forms must be printed to precise tolerances so that they
are reliable for holding data. The ScanFlex option allows
for forms printed with less tight printing tolerances to be
scanned successfully on image scanners. Forms scanned
by Scantron scanners have the following features:
• Timing Marks: These are a regular series of short

black bars down the long edge of a form. They tell the
scanner where to find data on the form. Collectively,
they are called the timing track.
• Form ID Marks: These black squares typically align
with the first timing mark on the form. The number
and position of the Form ID Marks uniquely identify
each form that is used in a document.
68 ScanTools Plus
• Skew Marks: These are small black ovals printed on a

sheet that provide additional skew detection to
ScanTools Plus software. Skew marks are optional.
• Leading Edge: The edge of the sheet that enters the
scanner first. Form ID Marks are normally placed
here.
• Guide Edge: The edge of an OMR form that aligns
with the guide rail of the scanner. The timing track
always corresponds with the guide edge.
• Response positions: These are small ovals, circles, or
rectangles printed in color on the form; they indicate
where the user should mark the sheet. The response
positions line up in rows that align with the timing
marks.
• Clip Region (Image scanners only): The area of a
form defined for image clipping. Image clips are used
with editing and archiving, gray boxes, software bar
codes, and with the optional RealTime Character
Recognition component.
• Bias Bar (EZData scanners only): The EZData
scanner requires that a bias bar be defined for every
sheet of every form. A bias bar is a row of 12 black
cells and is used at scanning time to make certain the
scanner read head is functioning properly before
scanning forms. The bias bar is printed on each side of
the forms used by the EZData scanner.
Enter the number that corresponds to the location of
the timing mark on which the bias bar is printed. If
you use the Scan button to define the EZData form,
the timing mark number is automatically inserted.
Valid values are 1 through the highest timing mark
number on the form. Zero (0) is an invalid number for
the EZData scanner.
User’s Guide 69
NOTE: Each of these features (except for clip region) is

shown in the following diagram:
Form IDs
Leading Edge
Bias Bar
(for EZData Scanners)
Guide
Edge
Timing
Marks
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
A B C D E F G H I J
Grid
Response String or Characters
Output Format Definition

When a document is scanned, the data (the document
record) is written to the data file that you specify.
Each document record is stored as a single ASCII

character string terminated by a carriage return and
linefeed.
70 ScanTools Plus
• The first 40 positions in the string are the NCS

Header data generated automatically by ScanTools
Plus software to uniquely identify each document
record. Refer to online help for more information on
the NCS Header.
• The remaining characters comprise the data that was
scanned from the document. The data is arranged in
the order you specify when creating the document
definition.
NOTE: If you selected “Sample Applications and Files”
during installation, the file 801 sample.dat is installed
in the Data Files directory under the directory where
ScanTools Plus software is installed (the default is
C:\Program Files\Scantron\ScanTools
Plus\Data Files). You may view it by selecting the
801 Application and the 801 sample.dat, then View
from the Data File menu in the ScanTools Plus main
window. (The file may also be viewed using any
standard text editor.)
Tools
ScanTools Plus software provides a set of tools that you
use to create the grids and other data that populate a
record format (see Tutorials, Appendices A and B). These
tools are arranged as buttons in the upper left corner of
the application module window. See the list of tools and
associated tool buttons below:
OMR Tool. Defines how response marks on a sheet are

to be interpreted as data. Do this by creating or selecting a
grid, then setting the characteristics of the grid. By default,
an image clip region is defined that is identical to the grid
User’s Guide 71
location; but, you may change the size and shape of the
clip region using Ctrl + drag. There is a Clip Attributes
button to access the Clip Attributes dialog for defining
archive information and characteristics of the image clip
associated with a grid. The image definitions are only used
when scanning with an image scanner.
Bar Code Tool. ScanTools Plus software supports both

hardware and software bar code reading systems:
• Hardware bar codes are supported for both OMR

and image scanners through an optional external bar
code reader attached to the scanner. The bar codes on
a document must all be in a vertical orientation, on the
top side of the scanned sheet, and located the same
distance from the guide edge. Up to six bar codes can
be read per sheet. Use the Bar Code tool to define the
relative position and number of characters in the bar
code.
If you are scanning with an image scanner, you can
optionally “draw” a hardware bar code clip region in
the grid definition area and access the Clip Attributes
dialog to define archive information and the
characteristics of the image clip associated with the bar
code.
• Software bar codes are supported for image scanners

through included bar code software. The bar codes on
a document may be in a vertical or horizontal
orientation, on the top or bottom side of the scanned
sheet, and located almost anywhere. The number of
bar codes per sheet is primarily limited by space. Use
the Bar Code tool to define the number of characters
in the bar code, the bar code orientation, degrees of
allowed skew, and bar code type.
Software bar codes are defined as image clips in your
application and you can access the Clip Attributes
dialog to define archive information and the
characteristics of the image clip associated with the bar
code.
72 ScanTools Plus
Codabar, Code 128, Code 25, Code 39, and UPC/EAN

bar code types are supported by both hardware and
software bar code reading systems. Additionally, PDF417
bar code type is supported by software bar code.
Hardware bar code decodes these types automatically.
Software bar code can be set to decode these types
automatically or you can set it to look for just the specific
types you expect.
Graybox Tool. For image scanners only, a graybox

defines a region of the form to be evaluated for the
presence of data (e.g., a written comment, hand printed
text, or machine printed text). If the mark value of a
Graybox region exceeds the threshold you define, the
region is considered to contain data and is clipped. The
image clip is used for post-scan editing or archiving or, if
the optional RealTime Character Recognition component
is installed, for text recognition.
• By default, the image clip region is identical to the data

evaluate region. If desired, the size and shape of the
clip region can be changed so that each is different.
You can use Ctrl+Drag in the Application Module
grid definition area to extend the clip area or you can
select the Grid Measurement button to access the
Grid Measurement dialog where you can define each
region.
• The Clip Attributes button is used to access the Clip
Attributes dialog where you can define archive
information and characteristics of the image clip
associated with the graybox.
• The Resolution group box is available for you to select
Standard Graybox if you are clipping for editing or
archiving or ICR/OCR Graybox if you are clipping
for the optional RealTime Character Recognition.
If installed, the RealTime Character Recognition engine
returns the highest confidence character according to the
ICR/OCR Parameters defined. The post-scan editor,
using a graybox edit for ICR/OCR, will display the
User’s Guide 73
clipped image and the highest confidence character, an

asterisk, or a space, as defined in the edit profile.
• The ICR/OCR Parameters button is available to

access the Print Type, Output, and Content dialogs for
defining the physical aspects of the text expected in
the ICR/OCR graybox, if the optional RealTime
Character Recognition component is installed.
• The Test Recognition button is available to access the
Recognition Results dialog where you can view
character recognition results of a sample scanned
sheet containing hand print or machine print
characters. This is available if the optional component
RealTime Character Recognition component is
installed, and the graybox Resolution selected is ICR/
OCR Graybox, and you are using an image scanner.
Translate Tool. The Translate Tool creates a custom grid
type and defines what the output characters are for each
response position in the grid. You can import translate
tables from a different application into the currently open
application. Every translate table name appears as a Type
in the OMR tool in all documents in the application.
Literal Tool. The Literal tool defines a character or string

of characters that is always written to every document
record. It is also used to define selected parts of the NCS
Header, such as the serial number, scan data, or the batch
number, to be included in your data file. This tool does
not provide an image clip for image scanners.
Image Clips for OMR Grids, Bar Codes, and Grayboxes
When used with image scanners, ScanTools Plus software
is a system based on the clipping of images; that is, rather
than saving all pixels from every piece of paper passed
through the scanner, ScanTools Plus software saves only
those portions of the image that are needed later, either
for Key From Image (KFI), edit correction, archiving, bar
code, or ICR/OCR (with the RealTime Character
Recognition optional component). ScanTools Plus
software supports a clip region for each OMR grid, bar
74 ScanTools Plus
code, or graybox (by default, software bar code and

graybox clip regions match their evaluate regions). This is
the area that will be clipped; on edit failure, for archiving,
or for ICR/OCR resolution.
By default, clip regions match their evaluate regions. To re-

define the clip region to be different from the evaluate
region, drag the cursor over the area you want defined
while pressing the Ctrl key.
For grayboxes and bar codes, you can also use the Grid
Measurement dialog to define or modify each region.
Select the Grid Measurement dialog from either the
Graybox Tool dialog or the Bar Code Tool dialog to
define the unit of measurement and exact location of the
graybox or bar code clip and evaluate regions. For more
information on grid measurement, see online help.
NOTE: For OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 (with Imaging)
Scanner Users: As absolute Units of Measurement
(.001 in and .01 mm) is an advanced feature of
ScanTools Plus software, utilizing the full capabilities
of OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 (with Imaging) scanners,
you should ensure that your scanner includes the
advanced features in scanner Manufacturing Level
ML013 or greater. To verify your scanner
Manufacturing Level, look at the serial number label
on the back of the scanner and read the “ML”
number:
User’s Guide 75
If the ML number is less than ML013, call Scantron

Customer Support at 800-338-5544 to arrange to have
your scanner enhanced to this Manufacturing Level.
For International users, contact your local sales agent.
Using the Clip Attributes dialog on the associated tool,

you may select archiving of the individual image clip for
each grid, bar code, or graybox as part of the ScanTools
Plus application definition. For more information on
archiving images, see Chapter 8.
If you are using an image scanner, you can use the

software bar code section of the Bar Code tool dialog to
define decoding characteristics for bar codes within the
bar code clip. In addition, you can use Test Bar Code to
test bar code decoding.
If the full version of the RealTime Character Recognition

optional component is installed, you may use the ICR/
OCR Parameters dialog on the Graybox tool to define
character recognition characteristics for text within the
graybox. In addition, if you are using an image scanner,
you can use Test Recognition to perform character
recognition testing. For more information on ScanTools
Plus application definition for RealTime Character
Recognition, see the separate User’s Guide and online help
provided with the optional component.
Different OMR Grid Types
The ScanTools Plus Application Module provides the grid
response position strings for the grid types that are listed
below. All of these grid types are also displayed on the
OMR tool dialog box.
• Alphabetic, no space: This grid type contains no

space and the characters A-Z. It is provided with the
translate tool. Only one mark in an alphabetic string is
allowed.
76 ScanTools Plus
• Alphanumeric: The valid alphanumeric characters are

a blank space, A - Z, 0 - 9, and the following special
characters.
[.<(+\&!$*);^-/,%_>?:#@'="
Only one mark in an alphanumeric string is allowed.

This grid type is provided with the translate tool.
• Binary: Each position in the string represents a power

of two. The first bubble represents one, the second
bubble two, the third bubble four, and so on. Multiple
marks are allowed. The values of all the marked
bubbles are added together to produce the value of the
grid. For example, marking the first (1), third (4), and
fifth (16) bubbles will produce the following grid value
(1 + 4 + 16 = 21).
NOTE: Binary grids CANNOT have preslug resolution
defined as an attribute in the Output field Entry.
Also, you CANNOT define a preslug edit in an
edit profile for this grid type.
• BCD (binary-coded decimal): A five-position string

(1248P) similar to binary, except that only the decimal
numbers 0 through 9 can be represented by the
response position string (10 through 15 cause the
character “*” to be written to the document record).
The fifth position is a parity bit. ScanTools Plus
software uses odd parity. If the parity bit is incorrect, a
“*” character is written to the document record.
Multiple marks are allowed in each response position.
If only four positions (1248) are used, the parity bit is
not present and no parity checks will be made.
NOTE: Binary-coded decimal grids CANNOT have
preslug resolution defined as an attribute in the
Output Field Entry. Also, you CANNOT define a
preslug edit in an edit profile for this grid type.
User’s Guide 77
• Binary (Scoring): This grid type allows for multiple

correct answers during test scoring. (ScanTools Plus
Score Module does not support multiple correct
marks.)
NOTE: Binary scoring grids CANNOT have preslug
resolution defined as an attribute in the Output
Field Entry. Also, you CANNOT define a preslug
edit in an edit profile for this grid type.
• Binary with Parity: Each position in the string

represents the number 0 or 1. The highest-order
position represents a parity bit. ScanTools Plus
software uses odd parity. If the parity bit is incorrect, a
“*” character is written to the document record. If no
bubble is marked in a response position string, a zero
(0) is written in the data record. Multiple marks are
allowed in each response position.
NOTE: Binary with parity grids CANNOT have preslug
field Entry. Also, you CANNOT define a preslug
• Litho-code: Unique serial numbers applied when the

form was printed. The coding scheme is the same as
binary, except that no parity bit is provided for. Your
Scantron Print Services representative can discuss the uses of
litho-codes with you.
NOTE: Litho-code grids CANNOT have preslug
field Entry. Also, you CANNOT define a preslug
• Numeric: The decimal numbers 0 through 9. Only

one mark is allowed in each response position. This
type is provided with the translate tool.
• One digit response: The decimal numbers 1 through
9. Only one mark is allowed in each response position.
This type is provided with the translate tool. In order
to score, test questions must be defined as either a
one- or two-digit response.
78 ScanTools Plus
• Two digit response: The decimal characters 01

through 99 represented as a single response position
string. Only one mark is allowed in each response
position. This type is provided with the translate tool.
In order to score, test questions must be defined as
either a one- or two-digit response.
• Translate: Each response position is translated to one
or more output characters defined in the translate
table. You can create your own translate tables in
addition to those provided by ScanTools Plus
software. You can also import translate tables from a
different application into the currently open
application. The following standard translate types are
provided with the translate tool:
• Alphabetic, no space
• Alphanumeric
• Numeric
• One-digit response
• Two-digit response
Application Options
The Options item on the ScanTools Plus Application
Module window menu bar enables you to select other
parameters associated with a ScanTools Plus application:
• Sequence defines what document sequences are

acceptable when scanning a multi-document
application.
NOTE: Sequence is active only when more than one
document is defined in the application.
• Confirmations enable you to define which actions in

ScanTools Plus software will generate a confirmation
dialog box.
User’s Guide 79
• Read Controls define the level of control the

ScanTools Plus application user has in adjusting the
threshold and discrimination settings from ScanTools
Plus software.
• Form ID Matching provides an enhanced check for
documents in the same application that have different
widths but have identical Form ID Marks for the area
they have in common.
• iNAME Configuration provides the parameters
used for scan-time image archiving, including which
images to archive, the destination directories for the
image files, single or multi-image files created, if user
exits are also being used, index file format, defining
the actual index entries that will be written to the
index file, and whether or not to run iNAME Merge
after scanning.
80 ScanTools Plus
Creating a ScanTools Plus Application

This section describes in detail the steps for creating a new
ScanTools Plus application or a ScanTools Plus
application by modifying an existing one. For more
specific details, refer to Appendices A and B.
Start ScanTools Plus Application Definition

To start ScanTools Plus Application Definition select
Application from the ScanTools Plus main window menu
bar; then click New. The ScanTools Plus Application
Module window is displayed.
NOTE: The window below is an example only.
User’s Guide 81
Open an Existing ScanTools Plus Application for

Modification
To modify an existing ScanTools Plus application, do the
following:
1. In the ScanTools Plus Main dialog box, select the

application you want to modify from the Application
drop-down list and then select Application from the
menu bar and click Open.
Or;
Select Application from the menu bar and click

Open.
2. In the Open Application dialog box, select the

application you want to modify, then select the Title
or Number from the drop-down list, and then click
OK.
Select Application Settings

From the Application selection on the menu bar, select
Settings. The Application Settings dialog box is
displayed. The settings in this dialog are primarily used by
image scanners. The values defined in this dialog are
used by all documents in the application. Application
Settings include the following items, all are explained in
detail in online help.
• Release for Scanning - required for scanning from the

main screen.
• Inverted Transport Printing - if the currently
configured scanner does not have a printer installed,
this appears in red.
• User Exit File Name, if used
• Image Settings - All of the remaining settings are used
by image scanners only. If you are using an OMR
scanner you can still select image settings if you plan
82 ScanTools Plus
to use an image scanner at some time. The settings will

be ignored for the OMR scanner during scanning (not
during application definition).
• OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150 and 5000i scanners
only settings:
• Read Mode - resolution vs. speed
• Sheet Length for Thickness Measurement -
used to ensure detected double sheets do not
produce thickness errors due to thicker areas
(e.g., bar codes) on the form.
Select or Create a Document

To select an existing document, do the following:
1. Select Document from the ScanTools Application

Module window menu bar and click Select. The
Select Document dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Title drop-down list to select the document

you want.
3. Click OK.
To create a new document, do the following:
1. Select Document from the menu bar and click New.

The New Document dialog box is displayed.
2. Type the document name in the Title field.
3. If you have a .tif file of the background form image,

add it to the document with the Add All Images or
Add Image button. Timing marks and form ID mark
locations are automatically defined from the
background image, the information is displayed in the
lower half of the dialog box.
4. If you do not have the background .tif file, load your

scanner with a sample document. If the document has
User’s Guide 83
more than one sheet, make sure the sheets are in the
correct order. Click the Scan All button. When the
sample document has completed scanning,
information about the timing marks and the form ID
marks of each sheet is displayed in the lower half of
the dialog box.
5. If no scanner is attached, manually enter the number

of timing marks and the form ID mark locations.
6. If skew marks are printed on the document, they must

be defined manually. Skew marks are not automatically
defined by scanning a sheet and/or adding a
background .tif file. Use Skew Mark Locations, Add
button to display the Add Skew Mark dialog where
you enter location information for each skew mark on
each side of the sheet.
7. Click OK.
Import a Document
WARNING: Whenever you modify an application in
ScanTools Plus software, any edit, score, or
! conversion profiles associated with that application

are invalidated. This includes importing documents
into an application. You must re-create the profiles.
You can import a document in the following three ways:
• Import a document created in Scantron

DesignExpert™ software.
• First export the document from Scantron
DesignExpert software; this creates a ScanTools
Plus application file with an .SDS (ScanTools
Document System) extension. Use this .SDS file
as the application containing the document you
wish to import.
• Second, if you are using Scantron DesignExpert
sofware with the optional PrintFlex module,
export the background form image files. This
84 ScanTools Plus
creates a file with .TIF extension for each sheet

side. Use this .TIF file as the background form
image during application definition, and for
editing and archiving.
NOTE: Image information defined in Scantron
DesignExpert software cannot be imported
into ScanTools Plus.
• Import a document from one application into another

application.
• Import a document within the same application
(modify Form IDs and create a similar document). To
do this, select the same application that is now open.
To import a document, do the following:
1. In the Application Module, open the application you

want to import the document into.
2. From the Document menu, select Import

ScanTools Document. The Select Application File
3. Select the application containing the document you

want to import and click OK. The Select Document
to Import dialog box is displayed.
NOTE: Only applications with the .SDS extension can
be imported.
4. Select the Title of the Document to Import and the

Document Number in the Destination
Application; then, click OK.
5. During the import operation, Document Titles,

Record Formats, and Translate Tables are checked for
duplication. When a duplicate item is found, a dialog
box is displayed explaining the problem and giving you
options to correct it.
User’s Guide 85
6. After importing a document, save the application in

one of two ways: 1) use the Save function on the
Application menu to save it to the same application
name and number, or 2) use the Save As function to
save it to a different application name and number.
7. If you have exported background form image files

from the optional Scantron DesignExpert PrintFlex
module, you can add them to your document. Use the
Add All Images or Add Image button in the Select
Document or New Document dialog.
See online help for full details about importing a

document.
Select or Create an Output Format

A document definition must be associated with an output
format. When you select a document, the output format is
automatically selected.
To select and view an existing Output Format click Select

from the Output menu bar item.
NOTE: If you select a different output format from the one
that was associated with the document, the ScanTools
Plus Application Module window displays a “Delete
all grids for the current document and apply the new
output format?” warning message. If you press the
Yes button, all grids from the document definition
you selected will be deleted. The deletion becomes
permanent if you save the application.
To create a new Output Format, do the following:
1. Click New from the Output menu bar item.
2. In the New Output Format dialog box, type the

name of your new format in the Name field.
3. Click the check box to select the Apply Output

Format to current document.
86 ScanTools Plus
4. Click OK.
If you are scoring and want to store total and/or subtest

scores in the output record, you must define fixed length
fields in the output record that are not associated with a
grid to be used after scoring to store the scores.
Define Output Fields and Append Grids

Refer to the tutorials in Appendices A and B to learn how
to define fields in the output format and associate grids
with them. Online help also describes how to perform this
task.
The following steps briefly summarize this process:
1. Open the ScanTools Plus Application Module win-

dow.
2. If you are working with a multi-sheet document, select

the sheet you will be working on from the Sheet
control in the left side of the Application Module
window.
3. If the grid requires a translate table, use the Translate

tool to define it. You can also import translate tables
from a different application into the currently open
application.
4. Open the OMR Tool.
User’s Guide 87
The OMR tool is used to define grids on a sheet.
5. If a background form image on the right side of the

window is not displayed with enough detail to define
the grid starting and ending point, mark reference
response positions for the grid you want to define on a
sample sheet and load it into your scanner. (Refer to
the tutorials in Appendices A and B for hints on how
to mark grids.) In the lower left corner of the
ScanTools Plus Application Module window, click the
Scan Sheet button. After scanning, the marked
response positions will be visible in the grid definition
area.
6. In the lower left corner of the ScanTools Plus

Application Module window, click New. The Output
Field Entry dialog box is displayed.
7. Define the name and characteristics of the output field
that data from the grid will be transferred to.
8. Click OK.
9. Select Application from the menu bar; then, select

Save. For new applications, the Save As dialog box is
displayed. Enter a name and number for the
application and click OK.
88 ScanTools Plus
NOTE: You can select an existing field in the field list

box to associate with the grid. In that case, skip
steps 6 through 8.
10. Select the boundaries of the grid using the OMR Tool.
(See the tutorials in Appendices A and B for
examples.)
11. In the lower left corner of the ScanTools Plus

Application Module window, ensure the field you want
is highlighted, click the Append button. This
associates the grid with the output field.
12. Repeat steps 6 through 11 for every grid to be defined.
Select Options
From the Options selection on the menu bar, you can
define other parameters associated with the application
definition. These include Sequence of documents,
Confirmations, Read Controls, Form ID Matching, and
iNAME Configuration. Save the ScanTools Plus
Application. Select Application from the menu bar; then,
select Save.
Release for Scanning

When you have completed defining the application,
ensure that Release for Scanning is checked in the
Application Settings dialog. This is required for using the
application in the ScanTools Plus main screen.
Close ScanTools Plus Application Module Window

Select Application from the menu bar; then, select Exit.
NOTE: If you are scoring, editing, or converting this
document, refer to the appropriate section or the
online help before creating edit, score, or conversion
profiles.
User’s Guide 89
Making an Application Disk

Applications are composed of a number of different files
that work together. You can copy an application definition
file and its associated edit, score, conversion, data files and
user exit files. For imaging applications, you can also copy
background form files, image clips, iNAME configuration
files, and RealTime OCR control files, as needed.
NOTE: Additional files required for the optional RealTime
Character Recognition component are automatically
included when you check “Data, ICR and Clip Files.”
The Make Application Disk feature is the preferred

method to use when you are preparing to migrate an
application to a newer version of ScanTools software.
NOTE: You are not required to save to a diskette. You can
also save to another location or to another media.
Use the following steps to create an save an application:
90 ScanTools Plus
1. From the Configure option on the ScanTools Plus

menu bar, select Make Application Disk. The Make
Application Disk dialog box is displayed.
2. Select the application(s) that you want to copy.
3. In the Copy Input/Configuration Files of Type

and Copy Output/Produced Files of Type sections
of the dialog box, check every type of file that you
want to copy.
4. In the Copy to field, type the drive letter and path

where you want the application files copied.
User’s Guide 91
5. Click OK. The Copy Application Files dialog box is

displayed:
6. Confirm that these are the files you want to copy and
make changes if necessary.
7. Click Copy. The files are copied to the location you

entered.
92 ScanTools Plus
Installing an Application
If you need to use a ScanTools Plus application that
resides in a location other than where ScanTools Plus is
currently configured in its Paths dialog, use Install
Application. This feature copies all application files to the
location currently defined in the Paths dialog.
The Install Application feature is the preferred method to

use when you are preparing to migrate an application to a
newer version of ScanTools software.
To install an application from any valid drive, use the

following procedure:
1. From the Configure item on the ScanTools Plus

menu bar, select Install Application. The Install
Application dialog box is displayed.
2. In the Directories panel, select the directory the

application files are located in.
User’s Guide 93
3. In the Files panel, select the file(s) you want to copy.

Once a file is selected, use the Details button to see
more information about the application file.
4. Click OK. The application files are copied to the

location selected in the Paths dialog.
94 ScanTools Plus
Deleting an Application
Deleting an application with ScanTools Plus software
enables accurate deletion of all associated files. Use the
following steps:
1. From the Configure item on the ScanTools Plus

menu bar, select Delete Application Files. The
Delete Application dialog box is displayed:
2. Select the application(s) you want to delete.

3. If necessary, change the check boxes to indicate
whether or not application, profile, data files, and
other associated files should be deleted.
User’s Guide 95
4. Click OK. The Delete Application Files dialog box

is displayed:
5. Confirm that these are the files you want to delete, and
make any necessary changes by clicking on the file
name to de-select it.
6. Click OK. The files are deleted.
96 ScanTools Plus
4
In this chapter:
Task Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 98
Parts of the ScanTools Plus Window . . . . . . . . . page 99
Configuring the Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 100
Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 102
Chapter 4:
How to Scan Documents
This chapter describes how to scan documents.
User’s Guide 97
Chapter 4: How to Scan Documents
Task Summary
Task Summary
This section briefly describes how to scan documents.
1. Configure the context:
• Select an Application.
• Select or Create a Data file.
• Select an Edit profile (optional - only for editing).
NOTE: If you are using an image scanner and edit
correction will be performed after scanning
(post-scan editing), you should select an edit
profile during scanning so that image clips can be
acquired and presented properly later in the
post-scan editor. Image clips of edit failures are
created during scanning, using the edit profile
selected at scan time. A different edit profile can
be selected for post-scan editing; however, there
may not be image clips displayed in the post-scan
editor for all edit failures, depending on how the
edit profiles differ. A field could have passed
editing during scanning, but failed using a
different edit profile in post-scan editing, therefore
the image clip was not captured during scanning.
Additionally, for grayboxes and software bar
codes, we recommend the same edit type be used
at both scan time and at post-scan editing.
• Select a Score profile (optional - only for online

scoring).
• Select a Conversion profile (optional - only for
online converting).
NOTE: You can also start scanning through a context
file. Refer to online help for more details.
2. Check the settings in the Scanning Options dialog

box (Options menu).
3. Load documents in the scanner and start scanning.
98 ScanTools Plus
Parts of the ScanTools Plus Window
Parts of the ScanTools Plus Window

When you start ScanTools Plus software, the ScanTools
Plus window is displayed.
This window has three parts:
• The menu bar enables you to configure ScanTools

Plus software and access the ScanTools Plus help
facility.
• The action bar displays buttons to initiate scanning,
editing, scoring, converting data files to other formats,
and archiving image clips.
• The file bar enables quick selection of files to be used
in a scanning task.
The display of the action bar and file bar is controlled
through selections made from the Options menu.
User’s Guide 99
Configuring the Context

When you scan documents, the final format of the data
depends on files that you control; i.e., the application
name, the edit profile names, the score profile names, the
conversion profile names, and the name of the data file
where the data is collected. Together, these selections are
called the context of the scanning task.
NOTE: You can specify the directories where the files are
located by selecting Configure from the menu bar
and then selecting Paths from the drop-down list.
You can specify the context by selecting files in one of

three places:
• The file bar (shown below).
• The menu bar items - Application, Data File, Edit,

Score, or Convert. Each of these has a Select item,
where you can select the file you need.
• The Scanning Options dialog box.
The File Bar

The file bar is displayed beneath the menu bar on the
ScanTools Plus main window through selections made
from the Options menu. Once displayed, each
component of the context (i.e., the Application, Data file,
Edit profile, Score profile, and Conversion profile) can be
selected from here.
NOTE: ScanTools Plus software may override your file bar
selections with the file names you choose in the
Scanning Options dialog box.
100 ScanTools Plus

The Scanning Options Dialog Box

The Scanning Options dialog box offers you even more
control over the context than the file bar does. Additional
features include the following:
• Automatic naming of data files

• Enabling/disabling data file and profile choices made
on the File Bar
• For data files that already contain data, whether to
append or replace (overwrite) the new data
• Control of serial, batch, and run numbers
• Types of errors that will cause ScanTools software to
stop the scanner
• Enabling online edit correction of document records
while scanning
• Setting scanner read parameters for mark threshold
and discrimination
To access the Scanning Options dialog box, use the

following steps:
• Select Options from the menu bar.

• Select Scanning Options from the drop-down list.
The Scanning Options dialog box is displayed.
User’s Guide 101

Scanning
Scanning
Once you have configured the context for your scanning
task, load the documents to be scanned into your scanner.
You can start scanning in one of three ways:
• Click the Scan button in the action bar

• Select Actions from the menu bar; then select Scan;
or
• Press the F2 function key
While the scanner is in operation, the Scanning progress

window is displayed.
The information contained in this progress window is

self-explanatory and varies depending on the context you
have selected.
IMPORTANT: The ASCII data file created by ScanTools Plus
software can be used without further processing. You
can also use ScanTools Plus features for editing,
scoring, or converting data files.
Scanning will stop for any of three reasons:
• The scanner runs out of documents.

• A scanner error, such as a jam or communications
error, occurs.
102 ScanTools Plus

Scanning
• An edit error; the edit profile that you are using forces
scanning to stop.
Scanner Errors
A scanner error occurs when your scanner is not capable
of performing its basic functions with a sheet, for reasons
such as:
• Unknown form ID marks or timing marks.

• Skew mark detection failure.
• A sheet jam in the scanner.
• Communications errors between the scanner and your
computer.
• Input hopper is empty.
ScanTools Plus software displays the Scanner Error

dialog box when scanner errors occur.
User’s Guide 103

Scanning
The Error(s) and Recovery fields are self-explanatory.

They contain detailed information about the nature of the
error and the steps that you need to take to recover.
The Last document field identifies the last complete

document that scanned successfully. Expecting sheet
shows which sheet in the current document is expected by
ScanTools Plus software.
The course of action you take to recover from a scanning

error depends on the scanning task you are performing, as
well as the nature of the error.
• If scanning stopped and the sheet causing the problem

can be corrected, you can restart scanning at that sheet
by pressing Resume.
• If your scanning task allows you to remove the faulty
document from the batch and continue scanning, you
can restart scanning by pressing Rescan Document.
• The Rescan Document button is only enabled when
you are scanning a booklet and are expecting some
sheet other than the start of the document.
• If you need to stop scanning at that document, press
Stop. (Data for prior documents in the batch is saved
to the data file.)
Edit Errors
The edit profile you select (if any) may contain validation
tests or other criteria that documents must conform to;
i.e., the presence of data in mandatory fields, the absence
of multiple marks, etc. If a document fails an edit profile's
tests, ScanTools Plus software can handle the document or
document record in one of several ways:
• ScanTools Plus software can select the failing

document for manual correction, either by stopping
the scanner or by diverting the document into the
select stacker.
104 ScanTools Plus

Scanning
• ScanTools Plus software can queue the failing

document record for online edit corrections. An Edit
Correction dialog box is displayed during scanning,
enabling you to review and correct the error before
the document record is saved to the data file.
ScanTools Plus does not display image clips during the
online edit correction process.
• ScanTools Plus software can flag the failing document
record as it is written to the data file for correction
after scanning.
Edit Correction Dialog Box

If Online Edit Correction is selected in Scanning
Options (does not support Imaging), each time a
document fails an edit profile test, the Edit Correction
dialog box is displayed during scanning. This dialog box
enables you to review and correct the error before the
document record is saved to the data file.
User’s Guide 105

Scanning
To correct each edit failure as it occurs, use the following

steps:
1. Examine the Edit Correction dialog box to see why

the data is in error. The Text box shows the invalid
data.
2. In the Text box, type the correct data for the field.
3. Click the Next Field button. If the change you made

corrects the failure, the status in the Field window for
this field will change from Failing to Corrected, and
the next failing field will be displayed.
If the failed field is set up as an optional correction in

the edit profile, you can click Next Field without
changing the text; the status in the Field window will
change from Failing to Viewed. When all the failed
fields in the record have been viewed, the record will
be removed from the Edit Correction dialog box.
The data file will accept the record with any changes
made or not made.
The Always Edit type is not presented during online

edit correction. You need to run post-scan editing to
deal with this edit. See online help for details.
If you are using an image scanner, the Graybox Edit

type is not presented during online edit correction.
You need to run post-scan editing to deal with it. We
recommend the same edit type be used at both scan
time and at post-scan editing. See online help for
details.
4. Repeat step 3 for all fields listed in the Field window.

When the last field of this record is corrected, the next
record that needs to be corrected will appear when
you click Next Field.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for all records in the queue.
106 ScanTools Plus

Scanning
6. To stop the scanning process, click Stop on the

Scanner Error dialog box, and then click Exit on the
Edit Queue Not Empty field.
You can then resume operation by clicking the Scan

button on the ScanTools Plus main window. The
scanning and the Online Editing session will continue
from where you left off.
User’s Guide 107

Scanning
NOTES
108 ScanTools Plus

5
In this chapter:
Task Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 110
Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 112
Modifying an Existing Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . page 115
Creating a New Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 117
Creating a Copy of an Edit Profile for use with the
Same Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 118
Post-Scan Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 119
Manually Editing Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 124
Chapter 5:
Editing Data
This chapter describes edit profiles and the editing
process.
User’s Guide 109

Chapter 5: Editing Data
Task Summary
Task Summary
edit profile, how to create a new edit profile, how to edit a
data file using an edit profile, and how to manually edit a
data file.
Modify an Existing Edit Profile

1. From the ScanTools Plus main window, select the
application.
2. Select and open the edit profile you want to change.
3. In the Edit Profile window, perform the necessary

modifications and save your changes.
Create a New Edit Profile

1. From the ScanTools Plus main window, select the
application.
2. Select New from the Edit menu and assign a name to

the edit profile using the first field of the profile.
3. In the Edit Profile window, perform the necessary

steps to create the new edit profile and save it.
Editing a Data File Using an Edit Profile

1. Select the application that is associated with the data
file.
2. Select the data file you want to edit.
3. Select the edit profile you want to use.

NOTE: If you are using an image scanner, image clips of
edit failures are created during scanning using the
edit profile selected at scan time. A different edit
profile can be selected for post-scan editing;
however, there may not be image clips displayed in
110 ScanTools Plus

Task Summary
the post-scan editor for all edit failures, depending

on how the edit profiles differ. A field could have
passed editing during scanning, but failed using a
different edit profile in post-scan editing, therefore
the image clip was not captured during scanning.
Also, for grayboxes and software bar codes, we
recommend the same edit type be used at both
scan time and at post-scan editing.
4. Check the settings in the Edit Options dialog box

(Options menu).
5. Select Edit.
6. Make corrections in the Edit Correction window as

errors appear.
Manually Edit a Data File

1. Select the application that is associated with the data
file.
2. Select the data file you want to edit.
3. From the Data File item on the menu bar, select

Open.
4. Edit the data file in the Modify Data File dialog and
save your changes.
User’s Guide 111

Edit Profile
Edit Profile
Data editing is used to check field data scanned by
ScanTools Plus software. Edit profiles are defined
separately from the application, but work only with the
specific ScanTools Plus application that was selected when
the profile was created. Any number of different edit
profiles can be defined for a single ScanTools Plus
application.
For image scanners, if you want to capture image clips of

the failing field, you must have the edit profile selected at
scan time. If you do not select an edit profile at scan time,
and later perform post-scan editing, image clips are not
available for viewing.
Several editing methods are available to you. Online

Editing and Online Edit Correction both take place at
scan time. Post-scan Editing and Manual Editing both
take place after scanning has been completed.
1. Online Editing takes place at scan time using the edit

profile selected. Scanned data is checked by an edit
profile and actions (reject record, stop scanner, select
sheet, etc.) are performed as sheets are scanned, based
on whether or not the edit passes or fails. If
replacement characters are defined in the edit profile,
that action is also performed during scanning. This
method is described in Chapter 4 (Scanning).
2. Online Edit Correction also takes place at scan time.

This feature is on the Scanning Options dialog. It
gives you the ability to review and correct edit failure
during scanning before the document record is saved
to the data file. The Edit Correction dialog box
displays a list of document fields that have failed edit
verification based on the current edit profile. If you
are using an image scanner, ScanTools Plus does not
display image clips during the online edit correction
process. This method is described in Chapter 4
(Scanning).
112 ScanTools Plus

Edit Profile
CAUTION: Online Edit Correction must not be used

with scan-time iNAME Image Archiving.
3. Post-Scan Editing lets you review and correct

records in a data file that have been flagged during a
previous scanning session. The Correcting Serial
Number dialog box enables you to review and correct
errors before the document record is saved to the data
file. If you are using an image scanner, we recommend
the same edit type be used for grayboxes and software
bar codes at both scan time and at post-scan editing.
NOTE: If you are using an image or OMR scanner, the
background image of the form comes from a .tif
file that must be supplied by the user and defined
in the application. The displayed image will be
only as good as the user-supplied .tif file. If you
have a background .tif file that was not supplied by
the form vendor, it may be suitable for application
definition, but it might not be suitable for post-
scan editing or image archiving.
4. Edit Data Files Manually. In this operation, you

open the data file, view the field data, and change the
data in the view window. No edit profile is associated
with this method of editing. Use this method
sparingly; only for data that has been erroneously sent
to the data file.
The On Failure dialog box in the edit profile enables you

to select the type of action to be performed on edit
failures. These settings apply to Online Editing, Online
Edit Correction, and Post-scan Editing. For example, you
can:
• Flag failed records so that you review them later

during a post-scan editing session.
• Clip images of failed fields (if you are using an image
scanner) so that you can review them later during a
post-scan editing session.
User’s Guide 113

Edit Profile
• Reject failed records so that they do not even appear

in the destination data file.
• Stop the scanner on a failing field so that you can fix
the problem.
• Select the failing sheet and send it to a select stacker
(if your scanner has one) during the scanning process
without stopping the scanner. Then, when the
scanning session is over, you can correct all these
rejected sheets and rescan them.
• Use the transport printer (if the scanner has one
installed) to print a message about failed fields and
their contents to help pinpoint the failures.
• Flag a graybox field (if you are using an image scanner)
so that you can perform key from image later.
• Flag a software bar code field (if you are using an
image scanner) so that you can perform key from
image later.
• Flag a graybox ICR/OCR field (if you are using an
image scanner and you have installed the optional
RealTime Character Recognition component) so that
you can perform key from image later.
See online help for more detailed information about the
settings required for the type of editing you need to
perform with your application.
114 ScanTools Plus

Modifying an Existing Edit Profile

Whenever you modify an existing edit profile or create a
new one, you use the Edit Profile window. To modify an
edit profile, select Open from the Edit menu; the Edit
Profile dialog box is displayed.
The window lists:
• The file name of the edit profile you selected.

• The application associated with the edit profile.
• The document(s) associated with the application.
• All fields within a document and details of the edit
defined for each field.
NOTE: If you selected “Sample Applications and Files”
during installation, the 801 Sample Application was
installed. The associated edit profile, 801 sample.$ep,
User’s Guide 115

is installed in the Profiles directory under the directory

where ScanTools Plus software is installed (the default
is C:\Program Files\Scantron\ScanTools
Plus\Profiles). You can examine this sample edit
profile while we describe it here.
Using the Mouse to Display Fields in Documents

By default, the Edit Profile window displays the field
titles of all documents associated with the ScanTools Plus
application. To hide/delete field options, do the following:
1. In the Edit Profile window, move the mouse pointer

to the document name and press the right or left
mouse button. A selection box is displayed.
2. Move the mouse pointer to the appropriate option

(e.g., Show All Field Edit Options), and press the
right or left mouse button. All fields in all documents
and the edit options associated with them are
displayed.
Changing Edit Profile Parameter Values

To change edit profile values, move the mouse pointer
over the value of the parameter you want to change, and
press the right or left mouse button. Whenever the mouse
pointer is over a changeable value, it changes from an
arrow to a magnifying glass.
The action of the mouse pointer varies, depending on the

type of parameter being changed.
• In some cases, the mouse pointer toggles the

parameter between two different values.
• In other cases, a selection box is displayed listing
available options.
NOTE: For information on options available when
modifying an edit profile, press the F1 key to display
ScanTools Plus online help.
116 ScanTools Plus

Creating a New Edit Profile
Creating a New Edit Profile

1. Open the Edit Profile window by selecting New
from the Edit menu in the ScanTools Plus main
window.
The window displays the documents associated with

the application. Edit options for all fields in all
documents default to No Edit.
2. Use the steps in the Modifying an Existing Edit

Profile procedure to change the default values in the
edit profile.
User’s Guide 117

Creating a Copy of an Edit Profile for use with the Same Application
Creating a Copy of an Edit Profile for use with the Same

Application
You can create a copy of an edit profile for use with the
same application it was copied from. This can save time
when you need more than one edit profile for an
application. To do this, open the existing edit profile, give
it a new name, and save it. You can continue to make
changes to the parameter values. See online help for
details.
118 ScanTools Plus

Post-Scan Editing
Post-Scan Editing
This section describes how to have ScanTools Plus
software edit an existing data file after scanning by using
an edit profile. Chapter 4 (Scanning) describes how to use
edit profiles for online editing which occurs during
scanning.
Selecting Edit Options

From the Options menu, select Edit Options. The Edit
Options dialog box is displayed.
NOTE: The settings in this dialog box affect only the

currently selected application. Each application has its
own Edit Options settings. You should check the
Edit Options settings each time you select a different
application and before you edit a data file.
The Data File group box and the Edit Profile group box
determine what data file and edit profile will be used for
post-scan editing.
Also, you can select from one of the following options:
User’s Guide 119

Post-Scan Editing
• Edit normally: Presents records for correction that

have not yet been accepted, as indicated in the NCS
Header, including records that an edit profile has not
yet verified and any records that previously may have
failed an edit verification.
• Recheck all records for edit failures: Presents
records for correction that are currently failing an edit,
regardless of the state of the NCS Header. By using
this edit mode, all records that were accepted with
errors will be presented for correction.
• Clear all edit flags: No editing is performed when
this option is selected. All edit flags in the NCS
Header of the selected data file are cleared. Any pass
or grid error flags are replaced with spaces in the NCS
Header area of the data file. Records that were flagged
for online edit correction or post-scan editing will
have their flags removed.
Selecting the Application, Data File, and Edit Profile

To automatically edit a data file, first select the application
that was used to create the data file; then, select the data
file and the edit profile that contains the criteria for
selecting invalid document records in the data file.
NOTE: Both the data file and the edit profile must be
associated with the same application before automatic
editing can occur. For image scanners, if a different
edit profile is selected for post-scan editing than was
selected during scanning, there may not be image clips
displayed in the post-scan editor for all edit failures —
depending on how the edit profiles differ. A field
could have passed editing during scanning, but failed
using a different edit profile in post-scan editing,
therefore the image clip was not captured during
scanning. Additionally, for grayboxes and software bar
codes, we recommend the same edit type be used at
both scan time and at post-scan editing.
120 ScanTools Plus

Post-Scan Editing
Starting the Edit Cycle

After selecting the application, the data file, and the edit
profile, you can start the edit cycle in one of three ways:
• Click the Edit button in the action bar
• Select Actions from the menu bar, then select Edit
• Press the F3 function key
Making Corrections
When you start the edit cycle, ScanTools Plus software
evaluates the document records in the data file according
to the criteria described in the edit profile.
If ScanTools Plus software encounters invalid data in a

field, it displays the following Correcting Serial Number
dialog box:
User’s Guide 121

Post-Scan Editing
NOTE: Image will be displayed only when using an image

scanner.
The contents of the failing field are displayed in the Text

field. The underline (_) indicates edit failures. You can
correct the contents of the field by moving the cursor to
the field and deleting or typing over the information.
When Auto Advance is checked, the cursor moves

automatically from failure to failure. When you are at the
last failing field in one record, you automatically advance
to the first failing field in the next record. If a document
122 ScanTools Plus

Post-Scan Editing
has no failures, the record is not displayed. The state of

Auto Advance (on or off) is saved between edit sessions.
To move between records, use one of the following

buttons:
• Quit to leave the editor. Changes made to records

prior to the current record are saved. Changes made to
the current record are not saved.
• Delete Record sets the Delete flag in the NCS
Header. Once you have marked a record for deletion,
it is not actually deleted until you perform post-scan
conversion on the data file. You must do the
converting after you close the data file.
• Suspend Record writes the changes you have made
to the current record but keeps the record flagged as
an edit failure. For example, if you cannot complete
the edit, selecting the Suspend Record button causes
the record to be returned to the data file still marked
as failing edit; therefore, when editing resumes, the
record will be presented again for correction. You do
not leave the data editor when you select this button.
• Accept as Good marks the current document record
as passing all edits, even if not all failures have been
corrected. Accept as Good is not honored if any of
the failing edits are mandatory and have not yet been
corrected.
• Previous Record edits a previous failing record in the
Field list; allows only one previous record to be edited.
This button is displayed only if at least one record has
already been edited.
User’s Guide 123

Manually Editing Data Files

You may also edit document records (without the use of
an edit profile) by using the Modify Data File window.
Selecting the Data File

To select a data file, you must first select the application
that was used to create the data file; then, select Data file
from the menu bar and Open from the Data file menu.
The Modify Data File window is displayed:
Using the Modify Data File Window

Use the Modify Data File window to display and edit a
specific document record.
Displaying a Specific Document Record

When the Modify Data File window is displayed, the first
document record is shown in the window. Use the Go To
button and the up/down arrow buttons in the lower right
124 ScanTools Plus

corner of the window to select the serial number of the

document record you want to edit.
Editing the Displayed Document Record

To edit the data displayed in the Modify Data File
window, move the cursor to the data you want to change
and type over it.
The following buttons are displayed in the Modify Data

File window during your editing session:
• OK saves any editing changes you made and closes the

window.
• Cancel deletes the editing changes you made and
closes the window.
• Print prints the contents of the document records you
select.
• Find searches for a character string you specify among
all document records.
• Options displays a dialog box that enables you to
show or suppress the display of the NCS Header data
or of spaces in the document record. It also enables
you to select the fonts used for displaying or printing
document records.
• Delete Record marks the displayed document record
for deletion. The button label changes to Undelete
Record if the record has already been marked for
deletion.
NOTE: Deleted records are not removed from the data file;
they are simply marked as deleted. Post-scan
conversion of this data file will ignore any deleted
records.
User’s Guide 125

NOTES
126 ScanTools Plus

6
In this chapter:
Score Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 130
The Score Profile Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 131
Modify or Create a Score Profile . . . . . . . . . . . page 132
Create a Copy of a Score Profile for use with the Same
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 135
Changing Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 136
Scoring an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Scoring) . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 137
Chapter 6:
Scoring Data
This chapter describes score profiles and the scoring
process.
User’s Guide 127

Chapter 6: Scoring Data
Task Summary
Task Summary
score profile, how to create a new score profile, how to
score during scanning, and how to score an existing data
file.
Modify an Existing Score Profile

1. From the ScanTools Plus main window, select an
application and score profile.
2. Open the score profile.
3. Make the necessary modifications and save your

changes.
Create a New Score Profile

application.
2. Select New from the Score menu and assign a name

to the score profile using the first field of the profile.
3. Ensure that the record format has room to store the

scores.
NOTE: This step can be omitted if scores will not be
stored in the document records.
changes.
Score During Scanning (Online Scoring)

1. Select an application.
2. Select a score profile.

box (Options menu).
128 ScanTools Plus

Task Summary
4. Select Scan.
Score an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Scoring)

2. Select a data file.
3. Select a score profile.
4. Check the settings in the Score Options dialog box

(Options menu).
5. Select Score.
User’s Guide 129

Score Profile
Score Profile
ScanTools Plus software can score single-answer multiple-
choice or true/false tests while they are being scanned or
they can be scored later (after the sheets have been
scanned) using the data files. Score profiles contain the
rules that ScanTools Plus software needs to score the
documents.
Each score profile is associated with a ScanTools Plus

application. To select a score profile from among those
available in your forms application:
• Select Score from the menu bar; then, click Select

• Use the Score profile box in the file bar.
Score profiles can be used in two ways:
• Online Scoring. You can select a score profile to

score data during scanning.
• Post-Scan Scoring. You can select a score profile to
score an existing ScanTools Plus data file.
130 ScanTools Plus

The Score Profile Window
The Score Profile Window

Whenever you view or modify an existing score profile or
create a new one, the Score Profile window is displayed.
This window enables you to change or enter the score

profile parameters. When viewing the profile, you can only
read the parameters; you cannot change them.
User’s Guide 131

Modify or Create a Score Profile

To modify a score profile, do the following:
1. On the Score menu, click Select.
2. In the Select Score Profile dialog box, highlight the

file name of the score profile you want to modify; then
click OK.
3. On the Score menu, click Open to display the Score

Profile dialog box.
4. Modify the profile using steps that are appropriate for

the areas in the profile you are modifying.
To create a score profile, do the following:
1. Before creating a new score profile, you need to open

the application to check some fields.
• Make sure that a field in a document being used

for scoring has Type defined as 1-digit or 2-digit
in the Output Field Entry dialog box. This is
often referred to as an Items field.
• Make sure that any field created to store the total
test score is set up as Type Numeric and Fixed
Length of 5 (or greater) in the Output Field
Entry dialog box (in this example, the field is
named Total Score). There should be no grid
associated with that field (i.e., displays with an
asterisk in the field definition area of the
Application Definition window).
• Make sure that any field created to store a subtest
score is set up as Type Numeric and Fixed
Length of 4 in the Output Field Entry dialog
box. There should be no grid associated with that
field (i.e., displays with an asterisk in the Fields
definition area of the Application Definition
window).
132 ScanTools Plus

2. On the Score menu of the ScanTools Plus main

window, select New to display the Score Profile -
(Untitled) window.
3. Move your mouse pointer over the first field in the

window, the Score Profile File Name entry
(Untitled) and click. The Profile Name dialog box is
displayed.
4. Enter a name for the profile, and click OK.
5. The next 5 lines of the display are application-wide

options. Click any of the lines that you want to change.
• Key Data dialog box: Select Keys scanned

online or Keys stored in profile.
NOTE: When keys are not stored in the Score
Profile, and post-scan scoring is performed,
you will be prompted to browse to the key
data file to be used for scoring.
• You can toggle between Apply edits to key data

and Do not apply edits to key data. This option
is displayed only if Keys scanned online is
enabled.
• Store Keys/Append dialog box enables you to
select if key data is also to be stored in the output
file.
• Print Scores dialog box enables you to select
which scores will be printed on the document.
• You can toggle between Sheet Compile
Compatibility Off and On.
6. Click the document name and a popup menu is
displayed. Select Add Subtest; the Add Subtest
7. Enter a name for the subtest and click OK.
User’s Guide 133

8. Go to the Store total score in field: none entry. Click

none to display the Total Score dialog box.
9. Select the field name you want and click OK.
10. By default, Formula Scoring is disabled. If you want

to use formula scoring, click the line, No Formula
Scoring to display the Scoring Factor dialog box. In
this dialog you can define the parameters for Formula
Scoring.
11. If you want to do translates, click Translates to

display the Translate dialog box.
12. Repeat steps 6-11 for each subtest. The only

difference is in step 8 where you click the Store
subtest score in field: none instead of Store total
score in field: none.
13. Click the Save button along the bottom of the dialog
box; then click OK. You have completed the score
profile.
If you want more details on the parameters, see online

help.
134 ScanTools Plus

Create a Copy of a Score Profile for use with the Same Application
Create a Copy of a Score Profile for use with the Same

Application
You can create a copy of a score profile for use with the
same application it was copied from. This can save time
when you need more than one score profile for an
application. To do this, open the existing score profile,
give it a new name, and save it. You can continue to make
changes to the parameter values. See online help for
details.
User’s Guide 135

Changing Parameter Values

Changing parameter values in a profile is simply a matter
of moving the mouse pointer over the value of the
parameter you want to change and pressing the right or
left mouse button. Whenever the mouse pointer is over a
changeable value, the pointer changes from a hand to a
magnifying glass.
The action of the mouse pointer varies depending on the

• In some cases, the mouse pointer will toggle the

• In other cases, a selection box will appear displaying
available options.
You are encouraged to experiment with any of the sample

score profiles (.$SP) associated with Sample Applications
701 and 801 to learn how to change parameters.
136 ScanTools Plus

Scoring an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Scoring)

To score an existing data file, use the following steps:
1. Select the application associated with the data file.
2. Check the currently defined Score Options.
3. Select the Data File.
4. Select the Score Profile.
5. Choose one of these actions:
• Click the Score button on the action bar.

• Select Actions, Score from the menu bar.
• Press the F5 function key.
6. Browse to the key data file when applicable.
A dialog box showing the progress of the scoring is

displayed.
User’s Guide 137

NOTES
138 ScanTools Plus

7
In this chapter:
Conversion Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 142
Output Formats for Converted Files . . . . . . . . page 143
The Conversion Profile Window . . . . . . . . . . . page 148
Modify or Create a Conversion Profile . . . . . . page 150
Create a Copy of a Conversion Profile for use with the
Same Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 151
Changing Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 152
Converting an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Convert-
ing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 153
Chapter 7:
Converting Data
This chapter describes the conversion profile and how to
convert standard ScanTools Plus data files into other data
formats.
User’s Guide 139

Chapter 7: Converting Data
Task Summary
Task Summary
conversion profile, create a new conversion profile,
convert a data file during scanning, and convert an existing
data file.
Modify an Existing Conversion Profile

application.
2. Open a conversion profile.

changes.
Create a New Conversion Profile

application.
2. Select New from the Convert menu and assign a

name to the conversion profile using the first field of
the profile.

changes.
Convert During Scanning (Online Converting)

2. Select a conversion profile.

box (Options menu).
NOTE: If you are performing online conversion, the
Scanning Option, Replace At Serial Number
(S/N) is not available at scan time.
140 ScanTools Plus

Task Summary
4. Select Scan.
Convert an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Converting)

2. Select a data file.
3. Select a conversion profile.
4. Check the settings in the Conversion Options dialog

box (Options menu).
5. Select Convert.
User’s Guide 141

Conversion Profile
Conversion Profile
When you scan documents using ScanTools Plus software,
document records are written to a standard text file in
ScanTools Plus software format. This format is described
in Appendix C.
ScanTools Plus software can also write a second, separate

data file in any of several different output formats.
ScanTools Plus software writes the converted data file
either during or after scanning. Refer to online help for
details. Depending on which output format you choose,
you may need to select options in two other areas:
• During scanning - for online conversion during

scanning whether or not both data and converted files
are created.
• NCS Header Year Format - format of the year in
the NCS Header of the converted data file, either two
or four digits.
You can use conversion profiles in two ways:
• Online Conversion. During scanning you can select a

conversion profile to convert data during scanning
and automatically create another data file in a different
format. This method is described in Chapter 4
(Scanning).
• Post-Scan Converting. After scanning, you can select
a conversion profile to convert an existing ScanTools
Plus data file into a different format. Another reason
to perform post-scan conversion is to create a new file
in which some records are deleted.
142 ScanTools Plus

Output Formats for Converted Files

ScanTools Plus data files can be converted into the output
formats listed below:
• Delimited ASCII
• Fixed length records
• SPSS® for Windows
• DOSSIER®
• IBM 3881 (ASCII or EBCDIC character sets)
• Y2K Compliant
The following output format types can no longer be

defined when creating or modifying conversion profiles. If
you have existing conversion profiles with these types, you
may still run them:
• DIF
• Sheet Compile
• SPSS/PC+
Delimited ASCII (.DLM, .TXT, or .CSV)

This format enables you to define how to mark (delimit)
the beginning or end of a field. When you select this
format, you must specify:
• Record Delimiter. The character(s) that ends every

document record. The default is the Carriage Return/
Linefeed (CR/LF) character pair.
• Field Delimiter. The character that separates data
fields. The default is a comma.
• Text Envelope. In ScanTools Plus software, the
character that marks the beginning and end of every
field. The default is the double quote ( " ).
• Header Record. Delimited conversion optionally
creates a “Header Record” which contains the field
names as defined in the application. The “Header
Record” will be the first record.
User’s Guide 143

The default settings are compatible with the

“comma-separated field” format that is easily imported to
many popular database and spreadsheet programs.
Fixed Length Records (.SDF)

The format is identical to the standard data file format
used by ScanTools Plus software, with the following
exceptions:
• The document record delimiters (which are the CR/

LF characters in the standard format) can be changed
to any other character string you specify.
• The converted output file is not terminated by a
Ctrl-Z character.
• Data fields can be omitted.
SPSS for Windows (.SPS and .DA1)

This format is used by the SPSS for Windows statistical
analysis program. When you specify this format,
ScanTools Plus software creates one or two files,
depending on which converted file header format
(two-digit or four-digit) you selected in the NCS Header
Year Format - Conversion Profile. When SPSS for
Windows is used, you cannot change the During
Scanning option to choose which files are created during
scanning.
• A text file (with the .SPS extension) contains

commands used by SPSS. The text file is always
produced, regardless of whether you selected a two- or
four-digit year for the converted header. The text file
is used with the appropriate .DAT or .DA1 data file. If
you selected a two-digit year for the converted header,
the .SPS file works with the standard ScanTools Plus
data file (.DAT).
• A converted output file (with the .DA1 extension) is
created only if you selected a 4-digit year for the
converted header year format. This file is a copy of the
original data file (.DAT) but without the end-of-file
144 ScanTools Plus

marker. Also, the converted output file is longer,

because it has a 42-character header to accommodate
the 4-digit year in the header. The file is in SPSS-
compatible format.
NOTE: The SPSS conversion format does not support
appending to the converted output file. Instead,
the converted output file will be replaced.
ScanTools Plus software determines and produces the

appropriate files, depending on which NCS Header year
format is currently selected (2- or 4-digit).
You can select any of the following Save options:
• Do not Save active file.

• Save as compressed active file.
• Save as uncompressed system file.
• Save as portable file (EXPORT command).
NOTE: When ScanTools Plus software creates a .SPS
file, the field names, which do not conform to
SPSS variable naming conventions, are aliased to
acceptable similar names.
Refer to the documentation for your SPSS for Windows

program for information on these options.
DOSSIER (.DSA or .DSE)

The DOSSIER format enables emulation of Sentry® 7008
and 7018 scanners. It contains document record headers
with control fields that describe the data in each document
record. You can specify that data files be written in either
User’s Guide 145

ASCII (.DSA) or EBCDIC (.DSE) code. Table 1 lists the

contents of the DOSSIER document record header.
Table 1
Field Length Source of data

Program ID 2 Entered in response to a prompt
Document ID 1 Entered in response to a prompt
Batch number 3 NCS Header
Filler 1 Not used
Serial check digit 1 Computed
Filler 1 Not used
Serial number 4 Lowest 4 digits of ScanTools Plus serial

number
Page ID 1 Number of pages in the document
Filler 1 Not used
Doc error flag 1 Always blank
Run number 1 NCS Header
Pocket flag 1 NCS Header
Delete flag 1 Always blank
Worst mark intensity 1 NCS Header

factor
Invalid response count 3 NCS Header
Grid error flag 1 NCS Header
IBM 3881 (.ASC or .EBC)

The IBM 3881 format emulates the structure of files
created by an IBM 3881 optical mark reader. Files can be
written either in ASCII (.ASC) or EBCDIC (.EBC).
146 ScanTools Plus

ScanTools Plus software enables you to select the

following parameters for the IBM 3881 conversion
profile:
• Character set: ASCII or EBCDIC. The default is
EBCDIC.
• Record delimiter: Any character or none. The default
is none.
• Serial numbering: Yes or No. The default is No.
• Select on: Select document record on any of the
following conditions:
• Pocket flag select (default) (NCS Header position
29).
• Edit flag select (NCS Header position 22).
• No flag select (do not select).
• Input multiple: Defines the character that represents
multiple responses within a response position. The
default is asterisk (*).
• Output multiple: Defines the character in the
converted file that represents multiple responses
within a response position. Options are:
• EBCDIC 3F (default)
• “@” symbol
Y2K Compliant (.Y2K)

The Y2K Compliant format produces a converted file
nearly identical to the ScanTools Plus data file, except the
date scanned in the NCS Header is always a four-character
year (either 19xx or 20xx), not a two-character year.
Like the ScanTools Plus data file, when scanning multiple

documents that use record formats of different lengths,
each output record is padded with spaces, if necessary, to
make all records equal in length to the longest record
format. A carriage return/line feed is used to terminate
each record, and an end-of-file marker (Ctrl-Z) is
displayed after the last record. The file extension for this
file is .Y2K.
User’s Guide 147

The Conversion Profile Window

Whenever you modify an existing conversion profile or
create a new one, the Conversion Profile window is
displayed:
This window enables you to select conversion profile

parameters, as follows:
• Conversion profile: Name of the conversion profile

or (untitled) if you are creating a new conversion
profile.
• During scanning: As documents are scanned,
whether you want both a ScanTools Plus data file and
a converted data file to be created or just a converted
data file.
• Output format: Output format of the converted file.
148 ScanTools Plus

• NCS Header Year Format: Two- or four-digit year

format.
NOTE: Beneath this parameter, several other parameters
may be listed (field delimiter, text envelope, input
multiple, etc.) depending on the output format you
select.
• Record format: Controls whether fields defined in
the application are included or omitted from the
converted data file.
User’s Guide 149

Modify or Create a Conversion Profile
Modify or Create a Conversion Profile

If you want to modify an existing conversion profile, do
the following:
1. On the Convert menu, click Select.
2. In the Select Conversion dialog box, highlight the file

name of the conversion profile you want to modify;
then click OK.
3. On the Convert menu, click Open to display the

Conversion Profile dialog box.
If you want to create a new conversion profile, do the

following:
1. On the Convert menu, click New.
2. In the Conversion Profile dialog box, move the

mouse pointer to the word (Untitled) and press the
right or left mouse button.
3. In the Profile Name dialog box, type a name for the

new conversion profile.
4. Click OK. A new conversion profile is created and

loaded with default parameter values.
150 ScanTools Plus

Create a Copy of a Conversion Profile for use with the Same Application
Create a Copy of a Conversion Profile for use with the Same

Application
You can create a copy of a conversion profile for use with
the same application it was copied from. This can save
time when you need more than one conversion profile for
an application. To do this, open the existing conversion
profile, give it a new name, and save it. You can continue
to make changes to the parameter values. See online help
for details.
User’s Guide 151


Changing parameter values in a profile is simply a matter
of moving the mouse pointer over the value of the
parameter you want to change and pressing the right or
left mouse button. Whenever the mouse pointer is over a
changeable value, the pointer changes from a hand to a
magnifying glass.
The action of the mouse pointer varies, depending on the

• In some cases, the mouse pointer will toggle the

• In other cases, a selection box is displayed listing
available options.
• When selecting fields to be included or omitted from
the converted data file, pointing at the field name and
clicking the mouse button causes the field name to
move to the opposite column.
NOTE: If the NCS Header is selected to be included,
you may optionally convert the date from a
two-digit year to a four-digit year.
You are encouraged to experiment with the sample

conversion profiles (.$CP) associated with Sample
Applications 701 and 801 to learn how to change
parameters.
152 ScanTools Plus

Converting an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Converting)

To convert an existing data file, use the following steps:
1. Select the application associated with the data file.
2. Check the currently defined Conversion Options.
3. Select the Data File you want to convert.
4. Select the Conversion Profile.
5. Choose one of these actions:
• Click the Convert button on the action bar, or

• Select Actions from the menu bar and Convert from
the Actions menu, or
• Press the F6 key.
A dialog box showing the progress of the conversion is

displayed. The converted file is placed in the data files
path defined in the Configure menu's Path dialog box.
The default is C:\Program Files\Scantron\ScanTools
Plus\Data Files directory.
User’s Guide 153

NOTES
154 ScanTools Plus

8
In this chapter:
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 155
iNAME Scan-Time Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 159
iNAME Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 162
Post-Scan Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 166
Chapter 8:
Archiving Images
Overview
During scanning, image scanners running with ScanTools
Plus can capture an image of any of the following items:
• OMR grid
• bar code
• graybox
• entire side of a sheet
The image clips are:
• collected during scanning – the OpScan iNSIGHT

2/4 scanner must use the OMR with Imaging
cartridge during scanning.
• viewed when post-scan editing the data record.
User’s Guide 155

Chapter 8: Archiving Images
Overview
• archived – this is optional, each image can be saved as

a .tif or .jpg image file.
Archiving saves each individual image clip in a separate

image file, and can sometimes take longer than scanning.
The factors involved include:
• the time it takes to get and decompress the image clip

and the background .tif. This varies based on the
compression rate of these images.
• the time it takes to combine the two images. This
should not vary except by image area clipped.
• the time it takes to compress and write the
compressed image. This can vary greatly based on the
chosen compression type.
• the compressibility of the image.
• the PC being used for archiving.
• the speed of the full storage path where the image is to
be stored.
• the network traffic/server load if the results are
written to network storage.
Archiving of images can be done in one of these ways:
• Scan-Time Archiving – done during scanning. Uses

iNAME Image Archiving. This function gives you
greater flexibility in naming the archive directory path
and files. Online edit correction cannot be used with
iNAME scan-time archiving. If you need to edit
scanned data or to rescore, you must use post-scan
editing and scoring, and any changes will be reflected
in the iNAME file names and indexes. After scanning,
if you have the .tif file(s) of the background of the
form being scanned, it can be merged with the
individual image clips, resulting in the clips positioned
over the appropriate area of the form. This is done
using iNAME Merge. The background .tif file(s)
should be supplied from the vendor who designed the
form.
156 ScanTools Plus

Overview
• Post-Scan Archiving – done separately after

scanning. Uses the data file and a corresponding .tif
file that was generated during scanning, Archive
Options, and the Archive button in ScanTools Plus.
You can use online edit correction during scanning.
Optionally, if you have the .tif file(s) of the
background of the form being scanned, it can be
merged with the individual image clips, resulting in the
clips positioned over the appropriate area of the form.
The background .tif file(s) should be supplied from
the vendor who designed the form.
application definition, but it might not be suitable
Either method of archiving requires certain items to be

defined in the ScanTools Plus application before scanning
is performed. It is best to decide which method of
archiving you will use when you are defining the
application.
Archiving produces two types of output files:
• Clip Files. Each image of a grid and/or whole sheet

generates its own image file. Scan-time archiving
allows a greater choice of assigning file names.
Post-scan archiving uses the six-digit document serial
number assigned during scanning, plus the suffix
defined in the application definition. The archive clips
have a .TIF file extension for compression types
Packbits RLE, CCITT G3 Fax, and CCITT G4 Fax.
JPEG compression archive clips have a .JPG file
extension.
Archive clips can be written in any of the supported
compression formats and bit depths. If a background
form .tif file is not used, the clip file is written with the
same bit depth as defined in the ScanTools Plus
application.
User’s Guide 157

Overview
When a background form .tif file is used, the depth of

the clip determines the bit depth of the final archived
image, as follows:
• Bitone clip, the background form is converted to a

bitone image and a single bitone image is written
to disk.
• 4-bit clip (only supported with RLE compression),
the background form is converted to a 16 gray
tone image, resulting in a 4-bit grayscale .tif file.
• 8-bit non-JPEG clip, 240 palette entries are
reserved for grayscale data from the clip, and 16
palette entries are reserved for the most popular
colors from the form, resulting in an 8-bit palleted
color .tif file.
• JPEG clip, the clip file is a 24-bit color JPG file.
• Index Files. The archiving process generates an index
file for the archived image files. The index file is not
used by ScanTools Plus, but is for the image retrieval
system that will be used to store and access the image
files. You specify the format you want for the index
file. For post-scan archiving, you specify where the
index file will reside. For iNAME, the index file is
written to the same location as the data file.
158 ScanTools Plus

iNAME Scan-Time Archiving

iNAME scan-time archiving provides the following
features:
• Scan-Time Archiving - image files are created during

scanning; no need to archive as a separate action after
scanning.
• Full Sheet Image Archive - allows single sheets with
no form ID marks and/or no timing marks to be
archived. To use this feature, the application must be
defined as a single document with a single sheet. Each
side of the sheet can be archived as a separate file. For
details, see online help.
• User Exits - if your user exit is defined in the
Application Settings dialog, iNAME can be
performed before or after your user exits. If your user
exit is defined in the iNAME Configuration, it is
always run after iNAME.
• iNAME Configuration - definition of iNAME
archiving parameters is included as part of the
ScanTools Plus application definition.
• Images to Archive - you select which grids and/or
sheet sides to archive, based on all available in the
ScanTools Plus application.
• Archive Image Scaling - optional; used to change
the resolution of the scanned images during archive
(See the Application Settings dialog box). The
archived images can be saved in resolutions of 200,
240, 300, 400, or 600 DPI.
• Archive Directory Path - a user-defined location, full
path name is defined using a Base path name and
Variable path name for destination of image files.
• Archive File Names - user-defined names, full file
name can be defined using a Base name and Variable
name for each image file name.
• Index Entries - more options are available than with
post-scan archiving.
User’s Guide 159

NOTE: Online edit correction cannot be used with

iNAME scan-time archiving; if you attempt to,
you receive an error message. Only post-scan
editing can be used. The image clips taken during
scanning will be used for post-scan editing. To
ensure you have the image clips you need for
post-scan editing, you should select the edit profile
during scanning and use the same edit profile later
during post-scan editing. If you use a different edit
profile than the one used during scanning, you
may not have the image clips to view in the post-
scan editor.
Application Definition for iNAME Scan-Time Archiving

This section describes briefly what is needed for a typical
application with requirements of form ID marks, timing
marks, OMR grids, bar codes, and grayboxes.
iNAME requires the following items be defined in the

ScanTools Plus application:
• Application Settings dialog:

• Enable iNAME is required to perform the image
archiving.
• Enable Image is required for the side(s) of the
sheet that contains OMR grids, grayboxes, and bar
codes for which you want archive images
generated.
• Release for Scanning is checked when the
application has been completely defined.
• Image Clips dialog, for each sheet of each
document, select the Clip Grayscale (grayscale/
bitone) choice, the Clip Compression type, and
Clipping Mode of Whole Sheet. This sets parameters
for all individual clips to the same values. If you want
the flexibility to have certain individual clips set with
different clip parameters, change the Clipping Mode
to Sparse (individual). This keeps the Whole Sheet
160 ScanTools Plus

settings intact, but also allows you to assign different

clip parameters for each OMR grid/graybox/bar code
when you use the individual Clip Attributes dialogs.
NOTE: The background form image file and rotation are
selected in the Add/Replace Background Form
Images dialog and displayed in the Image Clips
dialog. The file is not used at scan time by
iNAME. The background form image is not
included in the image files generated by iNAME
archiving, but can be used for the post-scan
iNAME Merge function, detailed below.
• Clip Attributes dialog, for each field for which you

want an image clip produced, under Archive, File
Name Suffix, enter a unique, meaningful name. The
name you enter will then be available as an Image to
Archive when you configure the iNAME parameters.
Do not check Archive this Clip; that would produce
a duplicate set of image files which would double the
storage needed for image files. If you selected Sparse
(individual clips) in the Image Clips dialog, you can
also change the Grayscale, Compression, and other
related clip parameters in each separate Clip Attributes
dialog.
• iNAME Configuration, as part of the ScanTools
Plus application definition, you must create an
iNAME configuration. Use the Options menu,
iNAME Configuration item to do this. It creates an
.ini file with the same name as the application. The .ini
file contains all the archive parameters needed for
scan-time archiving. This includes which images to
archive, whether to use the image format parameters
from the Image Clips dialog (whole sheet settings), or
from the Clip Attributes dialogs (individual clip
settings), directory path and file names, index file
entries, and the index file format.
At scan time, select the ScanTools application and edit
profile (if needed). Archiving of image clips will
automatically be performed during scanning using the
parameters from the iNAME configuration information.
User’s Guide 161

iNAME Merge
iNAME Merge
The image files generated by scan-time iNAME image
archiving do not contain the background form image and
are not rotated or scaled during scanning. iNAME Merge
is a post-scan operation that enables you to do any
combination of the following tasks for whole sheet clips
and/or individual grid clips:
• Merge the background form image into the image files

that were generated during scanning.
• Rotate the image clips generated during scanning, for
better viewing.
• Scale image clips to 200, 240, 300, 400, or 600 DPI to
match the requirements of the application using the
images.
iNAME Merge is performed after scanning is complete. It

can be run in two ways:
• Automatically, at the end of a scanning session; this

option is defined as part of the iNAME configuration.
• Manually, after scanning, using the iNAME Merge
button on the ScanTools Plus main screen.
Application Definition for iNAME Merge

Before iNAME Merge is run, the following items should
be checked in the ScanTools application. If you are
running it automatically at the end of a scanning session,
you should check these items before you scan. If you are
running it separately after scanning is complete, you can
check them after scanning and make any necessary
changes before you run it.
1. For Background Merging: In the application, check

the Add/Replace Background Form Images
dialog box and ensure that the appropriate Top and
Bottom Background Form Image files are
displayed. These are the background form image .tif
162 ScanTools Plus

iNAME Merge
files that were supplied by the vendor who produced

the form. If the file names are not correct, change the
selection. In addition to specifying background form
image files, the Add/Replace Background Form
Images dialog is used, if necessary, to rotate the
background form image into the scanned orientation
required for application definition. Scanned
orientation may not be suitable for optimal viewing
after scanning; however, you can use iNAME
Configuration to change the rotation of the scanned
and background images together for best viewing.
application definition, but it might not be suitable
The Fix Light Background Images and Remove

Black From Background options can be enabled on
the Image Clips dialog box, if needed. These affect
only the background image.
For whole sheet clips, the settings on the Image Clips

dialog are the only items needed for merging.
2. For Best Alignment of Merged Background Form

Image and Scanned Image: If your printed form
and corresponding background form image have the
required form ID mark in the correct location and two
timing marks at least four inches apart, use the OMR/
Merge Horizontal Adjustment in the Application
Settings dialog box. This improves the alignment of
the two images along the horizontal direction (x axis).
See online help for details.
3. For Rotation: Whole sheet and individual grid

rotation are defined differently.
For whole sheet clips, set the desired rotation in the

iNAME Configuration, Enter Image To Archive
Information dialog box.
User’s Guide 163

iNAME Merge
For individual grid clips, set the desired rotation for

each grid in the Clip Attributes dialog box.
If a background form image is being merged with an

image clip, the two are rotated together, using the
defined rotation.
4. For Image Scaling: In the application, set Archive

Image Scaling to 200, 240, 300, 400, or 600 DPI in
the Application Settings dialog box to match your
requirements. Leave the setting at None to retain the
scanned image resolution.
Starting iNAME Merge

iNAME Merge uses the application file and
corresponding iNAME Configuration (*.ini) file, along
with the data file and image files that were created during
scanning.
If the iNAME configuration defined in the application is

set to run iNAME Merge automatically after scanning,
there are no other actions you need to perform.
If you are running iNAME Merge separately after

scanning, before you run it, ensure that the configured
application and data paths are correct. To do this, select
Paths from the Configure menu.
Ensure that all the application definition items listed

above are selected appropriately for the iNAME Merge
process.
To begin iNAME Merge manually, after scanning has been

performed:
1. Select the application and data file that were originally

used for scanning the documents.
2. From the Options menu, select iNAME Merge

Options to specify the data file selection option to be
used for iNAME Merge. You may also choose to
164 ScanTools Plus

iNAME Merge
create backup files of the unmerged images on the

iNAME Merge Options dialog.
NOTE: iNAME Merge can be performed only ONCE
on a data file. If you select a data file for which
iNAME Merge has already been performed, you
receive an error message. If scanning and
appending to a data file, do not run iNAME
Merge until all scanning sessions using the data file
are complete.
3. Do one of the following:
• Press the iNAME Merge button on the

ScanTools Plus Main Window.
• Select iNAME Merge from the Actions menu on
the ScanTools Plus Main Window.
• Press F8.
After iNAME Merge is run, the merged, rotated, or

merged and rotated image files are stored in the directory
defined in the iNAME Configuration file. Additionally, if
Save a Backup of the Un-merged Images is selected in
iNAME Merge Options, the un-merged image files are
stored in the same base directory, using the same name as
the merged images directory, but with _backup appended
to the directory name.
User’s Guide 165

Post-Scan Archiving
Post-Scan Archiving
Post-scan archiving is done separately after scanning,
using the data file and a corresponding .tif file that was
generated during scanning. Optionally, if you have the .tif
file(s) of the background of the form being scanned, it can
be merged with the individual image clips, resulting in the
clips positioned over the appropriate area of the form.
Application Definition for Post-Scan Archiving

Before you can archive, you must create and save a
ScanTools Plus application with all appropriate output
fields and OMR grid/graybox/bar code definitions. The
following items are needed for post-scan archiving:
• Application Settings dialog:

• Enable Image for the side(s) of the sheet that
contains OMR grids, grayboxes, and bar codes for
which you want archive images generated.
• optional — set Archive Image Scaling to 200,
240, 300, 400, or 600 DPI to match your
requirements. Leave the setting at None to retain
the scanned image resolution.
• optional — if you are merging the background
form image, and the form has the required form
ID mark in the correct location and two timing
marks at least four inches apart, use the OMR/
Merge Horizontal Adjustment to improve the
alignment of the two images along the horizontal
direction (x axis). See online help for details.
• Archive Indices dialog, for each document, select all
fields you want available as index entries in the archive
index file. These field names will then be entered into
the archive index file. This is optional; if you do not do
this, field names will not be in the index file.
166 ScanTools Plus

Post-Scan Archiving
• Image Clips dialog, for each sheet of each

document, select the Clip Grayscale (grayscale/
bitone) choice, the Clip Compression type, and
Clipping Mode of whole sheet or sparse (individual)
clipping of each OMR grid/graybox/bar code.
• Clip Attributes dialog, for each grid for which you
want an image clip file produced, under Archive, check
the Archive this Clip check box, and enter a unique,
meaningful File Suffix Name. The name you enter
will then be used as part of the image clip file name. If
you are using a background form image (see Image
Clips dialog, above) and you want it merged with the
individual grid clip, check Combine with Form. If
you selected Sparse (individual clips) in the Image
Clips dialog, you can also change the Grayscale,
Compression, and other related image format
parameters in each separate Clip Attributes dialog.
Using this method lets you define different clip
parameters for each clip.
• New Document or Select Document dialog, use the
Add All Images or Add Image button if you have the
.tif file of the background image of the form. Specify
the file name under Top and Bottom Background
Form Image. The name selected is displayed in the
Image Clips dialog after you select it here. The
background image can be merged with the individual
clip, so you can view the scanned data in the context
of the form.
Starting Post-Scan Archiving

Post-scan archiving uses the data file and corresponding
.tif file that were created during scanning. Before you
archive, ensure that the configured data path is correct. To
do this, select Paths from the Configure menu. To begin
post-scan archiving:
1. Select the application that was originally used for

scanning the documents.
User’s Guide 167

Post-Scan Archiving
2. From the Options menu, select Archive Options to

specify the data file selection option to be used for
archiving. You also specify the directory where the
image files will be stored during archiving, and the
index file format to be used.
3. Do one of the following:
• Press the Archive button on the ScanTools Plus

main window.
• Select Archive from the Actions menu on the
ScanTools Plus main window.
• Press F7.
168 ScanTools Plus

9
In this chapter:
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 169
Scanner Compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 171
ScanFlex Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 172
ScanFlex Alignment Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 173
Forms Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 174
Printing Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 175
Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 176
ScanFlex/PrintFlex Guarantee. . . . . . . . . . . . . page 177
Chapter 9:
ScanFlex Option
Overview
The optional ScanFlex module is for use with image
scanners only. Using a Scantron OpScan iNSIGHT 70/
150, 5000i, iNSIGHT 20, iNSIGHT 30, or OpScan
iNSIGHT 2/4 (with Imaging) scanner, ScanFlex enables
you to scan OMR forms manufactured using a wide
variety of printing technologies, and printed on plain
paper. For example, you can print your own forms using a
PostScript™ laser printer, plain paper, and Scantron
DesignExpert™ software with the PrintFlex™ option.
This functionality is possible because ScanFlex is able to

adapt to some variations in OMR form printing.
Scanning-critical form features, including timing marks,
form ID marks, skew marks, and OMR responses can all
vary somewhat in location from form-to-form without
affecting scanning performance or data integrity. This
User’s Guide 169

Chapter 9: ScanFlex Option
Overview
enables less tightly defined printing tolerances that are

achievable by PostScript laser printers. Instructions and
tools, including the ScanFlex “Rules for Success” in
online help, the ScanFlex Alignment Guide, and the Sheet
Image Diagnostic, are provided to enable you to design,
print, and scan forms successfully.
ScanFlex requires no separate installation. When you

purchase the ScanFlex option, the 14-digit license key
entered for ScanTools Plus software installation
automatically installs the ScanFlex option as part of the
ScanTools Plus installation. When you start ScanTools
Plus software, the title of the main screen is: ScanTools
Plus with ScanFlex.
When ScanTools Plus with ScanFlex is installed, ScanFlex

is not automatically enabled. This gives you the
opportunity to enable it on an application-by- application
basis, as required by the forms you are using. ScanFlex is
enabled in the Application Settings dialog of each
ScanTools Plus application. This dialog also contains
other ScanFlex options. See online help for details.
Scantron guarantees forms scannability with ScanFlex

providing you follow the ScanFlex Rules for Success in
online help. See the ScanFlex/PrintFlex Guarantee later in
this chapter for information about the terms and
conditions of this guarantee.
170 ScanTools Plus

Scanner Compatibility
Scanner Compatibility
You can use ScanFlex with OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150,
5000i, iNSIGHT 20, iNSIGHT 30, and OpScan
iNSIGHT 2/4 (with Imaging) image scanners.
ScanFlex is not available for use with OpScan, OpScan

iNSIGHT 2/4 (OMR only), or EZData scanners.
User’s Guide 171

ScanFlex Features
ScanFlex Features
• Timing Track Location - If the timing track is
printed within a defined area of the form, ScanFlex
will find it and adapt to its location.
• Timing Mark Height and Width - ScanFlex expects
timing marks to be a consistent height and width. It
can optionally be set to ignore doodling or other
marks in the timing track that are not consistent with
average timing mark height and width.
• OMR Response Spacing - After the timing track has
been located, ScanFlex locates OMR responses
relative to the OMR response spacing you selected for
your application.
• OMR Response Scaling - ScanFlex can optionally
adapt to small variations in OMR response spacing.
Your form design must include a form ID mark in a
designated place to use this option.
• Image Clipping - If image clipping is performed,
ScanFlex will automatically adjust the size of the clip
area to compensate for variations in print location.
• Graybox Evaluation - If grayboxes are analyzed,
ScanFlex will automatically adjust the size of the
evaluation area to compensate for variations in print
location. This includes ICR/OCR grayboxes.
• Software Bar Code Evaluation - If software bar
codes are decoded, ScanFlex will automatically adjust
the size of the evaluation area to compensate for
variations in print location.
See online help for information about implementing each
feature in your form and in your ScanTools Plus
application.
172 ScanTools Plus

ScanFlex Alignment Guide
ScanFlex Alignment Guide

An Alignment Guide is provided with ScanFlex to enable
you to determine if your forms are designed and printed
within ScanFlex tolerances. This clear plastic guide can be
placed over your forms to check critical features before
you start print production and, periodically, during print
production. Using the ScanFlex Alignment Guide is an
essential part of verifying that your forms are designed
and printed according to the ScanFlex Rules for Success.
User’s Guide 173

Forms Design
Forms Design
You can use Scantron DesignExpert software to design
forms. It has drawing tools and other features specifically
engineered for OMR form design. In addition, it has an
optional PrintFlex module that enables you to print forms
for use with ScanTools Plus with ScanFlex. Other popular
graphic design software can also be used to design forms
although such products may not be specifically intended
for OMR form design and printing.
174 ScanTools Plus

Printing Forms
Printing Forms
• Printing Technology - You can use a PostScript laser
printer or an offset printing press to print your forms.
Other printing technologies are also possible.
• Paper - Use white, 24# bond paper with 84
brightness.
• Ink - Laser printer toner (ink) is usually scanner
readable. OMR forms require both scanner readable
and non-readable areas. You can control whether
printing is scanner readable or not by setting colors
and screen percentages in your form design and by
testing your printed forms.
• Testing Tools - In addition to the ScanFlex
Alignment Guide described above, you can use the
Sheet Image Diagnostic tool provided with ScanTools
Plus software to verify that your printing is either
scanner readable or not readable, as required, and that
marks are in the correct response positions.
User’s Guide 175

Scanning
Scanning
• Background Form Images - If required for
archiving and editing in your application, background
form images can be merged with image clips when
ScanFlex is enabled. To have the images align as well
as possible, use the OMR/Merge Horizontal
Adjustment in the Applications Settings of the
ScanTools application. The background form image
TIFF file should be supplied by the vendor who
printed the form, and should be in the same
orientation as the way the form is scanned. If you use
Scantron DesignExpert with PrintFlex software for
creating the form, you can create a background form
image TIFF file using the Export Background Form
Image option. If you have a file not supplied by the
form vendor, it may be suitable for application
definition, but might not be suitable for image
archiving and editing.
• Powered by ScanFlex - When ScanFlex is installed
and enabled in your application and you are using an
OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150, 5000i, iNSIGHT 20,
iNSIGHT 30, or OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 (with
Imaging) scanner, a “Powered by ScanFlex” pop-up
message is displayed briefly every time you start a
scanning session.
176 ScanTools Plus

ScanFlex/PrintFlex Guarantee
(Applicable to ScanFlex licensed users ONLY)
Providing You have strictly applied the ScanFlex “Rules

for Success” accompanying the Program, Scantron
Corporation further warrants that Scantron forms and
forms printed by You or another printing vendor other
than Scantron shall be scannable on Scantron image
scanners for which they are designed, and shall conform
to applicable specifications. Scantron Corporation
reserves the right to examine all of the forms claimed to
be defective or otherwise unacceptable under the above
warranty, and will, in the most expeditious manner, take
the necessary steps to correct any such problem. For
forms printed by Scantron, Scantron shall replace any of
its forms that are defective or do not otherwise meet this
warranty. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the above
guarantee shall be void and of no effect for in the event,
(1) You print Your own forms or acquire forms from
another printing vendor other than Scantron and do not
strictly apply the ScanFlex Rules for Success which
accompanies the Program.
User’s Guide 177

NOTES
178 ScanTools Plus

10
In this chapter:
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 179
Chapter 10:
User Exits
Overview
User exits are fixed points in the ScanTools Plus software
at which you can call and execute routines you have
written. They give you an easy way to add capabilities to
ScanTools Plus software. You can initiate actions during
scanning that cannot be implemented using ScanTools
Plus software alone; therefore, you have greater flexibility
to tailor ScanTools Plus software to your applications.
User exits can be used for scanning, for post-scan editing,

and post-scan scoring. The following are examples of
what you can perform with scanning, post-scan editing,
and post-scan scoring:
• Scanning
• Request scanner actions that alter the normal
sequence of events in the scanning cycle.
User’s Guide 179

Chapter 10: User Exits
Overview
• Modify buffers used by the scanner to

communicate scanned information.
• Clip images (if using an image scanner) from
scanned sheets in a variety of formats and pixel
depth.
• Post-scan editing
• Modify the data to be edited and the edit error
prompt before these are presented to the user.
• Do special edit checks at the record or field level
both before and after the data has been presented
to and edited by the user.
• Force a field to be skipped so a user will not see
the field and optionally place data in the field
(possibly from a pop-up menu of choices).
• Do verification at the field or record level of the
data, after it has been edited, and force the field or
record to be re-edited upon failure of this verifica-
tion.
• Post-scan scoring
• Modify the data to be scored prior to scoring.
• Analyze the data or other information and cause
the data record to not be scored.
• Capture the scores generated during scoring.
• Analyze the scores or other information and cause
the scored record to not be written to disk.
For any User Exit development, you must have ScanTools

software and you must use a C/C++ compiler that can
create Windows Dynamic Link Libraries (DLLs).
Scantron has developed and tested User Exits using the
following development platforms:

C++ .NET.
180 ScanTools Plus

Overview

C++ .NET
• Microsoft Visual Studio v6.0 SP6 - Microsoft Visual
C++.
NOTE: Languages other than C/C++ are not supported in
ScanTools software. User exits that were written for
Image ScanTools version 4.2 or earlier will not run
with ScanTools 6.0 or later. See Rebuilding User Exits
in online help.
During ScanTools Plus installation, you must select one

(or more) of the User Exit Shell Module components to
receive the required source files and Microsoft wizard files
that are used for User Exit development. Separate wizard
files are supplied for the Microsoft Visual Studio .NET
2005, Microsoft Visual Studio .NET 2003, and the
Microsoft Visual Studio v6.0 environments.
User Exit access within ScanTools Plus software divides

scanning, editing, and scoring operations into distinct
stages. Each of these processing stages has a User Exit
function call assigned to it. These functions are pre-
defined in the user exit shell code that is provided.
ScanTools user exit samples can be installed as part of the
Microsoft Visual Studio User Exit Shell Modules. The
User Exit programmer will not be required to create the
function calls applicable to these exit points. The
programmer will only have to insert code relevant to the
desired operation within these pre-defined User Exit
functions. For a complete list of User Exits, including the
name, number, function call, and brief description, refer to
online help.
NOTE: From inside the help system, you can print help
topics by clicking the Print button on the menu bar. If
you click on a book in the help contents and then click
Print, you are given the option of printing just the
selected topic, or the heading and all subtopics.
NOTE: If User Exit development service is required, contact
your Scantron representative.
User’s Guide 181

Overview
NOTES
182 ScanTools Plus

A
In this chapter:
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 183
Creating a New Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 187
Creating a New Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 189
Creating the Output Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 194
Saving the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 195
Selecting Document Image Format Settings in the Image Clips Window. . page 197
Defining a Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 201
Defining a Grid Using the Background Form Image Method . . . . . . . . . . . page 204
Associating a Grid with a Field using the Append Command . . . . . . . . . . . page 207
Defining a Grid Using the Outline Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 208
Defining the Clip Region for a Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 214
Setting Clip Attributes for Post-Scan Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 217
Defining a Date Field and the Associated Grids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 221
Defining a Single Clip Region for Multiple Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 224
Review of Field and Grid Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 226
Defining and Using a Translate Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 228
Defining Linked Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 233
Defining a Clip Region for Linked Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 235
Defining Grids Using Copy and Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 237
Defining a “Comments” Field and Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 244
Defining a Score Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 248
Releasing for Scanning and Saving the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 250
If You Need More Practice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 252
Appendix A:
for an Image Scanner
Introduction
This tutorial is intended to help you successfully define an
image application for use with post-scan archiving, using
the ScanTools Plus Application Module. In this tutorial,
you will start with a form #223022 General Purpose
Answer Sheet that has been designed for data collection.
From there, you will define image clips, fields, grids, clip
regions, translate tables, and grayboxes using the
ScanTools Plus Application Module. When you are done,
User’s Guide 183

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner
Introduction
you will have a ScanTools application that is ready to scan

for data collection.
This exercise is intended for use as an instructional aid for

first-time users as well as a reference for experienced
users. It is for use with image scanners only.
WARNING: This tutorial cannot be run on OpScan OMR
only or EZData scanners.
NOTE: If you have questions about the steps you are
performing, press the F1 key on your keyboard to
display context-sensitive help for the active window or
dialog box.
Before You Begin

• You should know how to use the Microsoft Windows
operating system.
• Your scanner, utility software, and ScanTools Plus
software (Application Development or Application
Development with Scoring variants) must be installed.
• You should know the characteristics of your scanner.
The tutorial applies to Scantron iNSIGHT 70/150,
5000i, iNSIGHT 20, iNSIGHT 30, and iNSIGHT 2/4
with imaging scanners.
• You should give special attention to Chapter 1,
“Overview” and Chapter 3, “Creating an Application”
of this manual.
• You must have several blank copies of General
Purpose Answer Sheet (GPAS) # 223022.
Form #223022 General Purpose Answer Sheet

This tutorial uses the form #223022 General Purpose
Answer Sheet (as shown below). This form can also be
used for many real-world purposes including:
• Demographic information (e.g., name, birth date,

identification number)
184 ScanTools Plus

Introduction
• Questions (100 items) used for tests, surveys, or

questionnaires
• Collecting comments including handwritten
information
801 Sample Application

In the lessons that follow, you will define an application
for the form #223022 General Purpose Answer Sheet. A
similar application comes standard with ScanTools Plus as
a sample application created by ScanTools Plus experts.
User’s Guide 185

Introduction
You may wish to use this ready-made application as a

reference as you work on your own application.
To access this ready-to-use application, perform the

following:
1. Select Scantron | ScanTools Plus from the

Programs list. Doing so starts the ScanTools Plus
Software and displays the ScanTools Plus main
window.
2. Select Application | Select... from the menu bar.
3. Select 801 - Sample 100 Item Answer Sheet from the

list box.
4. Click OK. The application loads and is ready for

scanning.
If you have questions during the tutorial, the 801 sample

application is available for you as a reference or to check
your work. The application can also be used for real-world
jobs including tests, surveys, or questionnaires.
NOTE: We recommend that you perform the following
lessons exactly as described in the tutorial so that the
application you define through the lessons is identical
to that in the 801 Sample Application.
186 ScanTools Plus


Learning Objectives In this lesson, you will:
• Create the new Application consistent with the 801

Sample Application.
• Select the appropriate Application Settings.
Terms Application: The ScanTools file where your application
definition is saved. Application files are saved in the
\Applications directory (default location is C:\Program
Files\Scantron\ScanTools Plus\Applications) with
an .sds suffix. An application can hold up to 255
documents.
Procedure NOTE: You need to use your scanner for this procedure.
Make sure that it has been set up properly and that the
power is turned on.

Programs list. This starts the ScanTools Plus software
and displays the ScanTools Plus main window.
2. Select Application | New from the menu. This

displays the ScanTools Plus Application Module
window.
3. Select Application | Settings from the menu. The

Application Settings window appears.
4. Uncheck the Release for scanning check box. An

application is not ready to be released for scanning
until an output format and at least one field has been
defined. We will check this box in a later lesson when
the application is complete.
5. Accept the defaults shown below for the Header

Translation check boxes. For more information on
their function, see the Including Selected Parts of
the NCS Header in Your Data File help topic.
User’s Guide 187

6. Ensure that .166 spacing (6/inch) is selected as the

Read Cell Spacing in the OMR From Image group
box.
7. Ensure Red (ink read) is selected as the Light Source.
8. Ensure High scan speed, low image resolution is

selected as the Read Mode if you are using an
OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150 or 5000i scanner.
9. Ensure For Top and Bottom or For Top Only is

selected in the Enable Image group box.
10. Click OK.
You have now successfully set the initial settings for your
188 ScanTools Plus

Creating a New Document

Learning Objectives In this lesson you will:
• Create a new document.

• Add a Background Form Image.
• Ensure that Background Form Image Rotation is
correct.
Terms Background Form Image: A digital representation of a
printed form in .tif format. Your forms vendor typically
provides this file. It is loaded into ScanTools and provides
a visual representation of the form on which grids can be
placed. It can also be merged with scanned data for editing
and archiving purposes so that the user has a more true-
to-life representation of the form.
Document: One or more sheets that, when scanned,

produce one document record in a data file. A document
can hold up to 99 sheets. The document definition
describes the document.
Form ID Marks: Small black rectangles at the top of the

form that uniquely identify it. ScanTools Plus requires that
each sheet in an application has a unique form ID mark.
Timing Marks: A column of small black rectangles that

follow the guide edge of the form. Each timing mark
indicates to the scanner a row in which response bubbles
can be positioned.
Step 1: Checking Image Orientation

Prepare for document creation by first viewing the
background form image to determine the location of the
timing marks.
Procedure 1. Using Windows Explorer, find the background form
image for this exercise that came with your ScanTools
Plus software. It is in directory C:\Program
User’s Guide 189

Files\Scantron\ScanTools Plus\Applications
with file name 223022.tif.
2. Open the file using an imaging program (like

Microsoft Paint) by selecting 223022.tif. Right click
and select Open With. Select Microsoft Paint from
the list by left clicking. The image will be displayed in
the Paint program. Note the position of the timing
marks. (They are on the left side of the image.)
You have now successfully determined the position of the

timing marks in the background form image. That
information will be important to you when you add the
background form image to your new document in the
next section.
Step 2: Creating the New Document and Adding the

Background Form Image
Next we need to create the document and add the
background form image. Knowing the location of the
190 ScanTools Plus

timing marks is important because we will need to specify

Rotation during this process.
Procedure 1. Select New from the Document menu to display the
New Document dialog.
2. In the Title field, type the name of the document. For

this tutorial, we will call it Learning Document.
3. In the Options section of the New Document (or

Select Document if restoring the background) dialog
box, click Add Image. The dialog Add Background
Form Images for Sheet 1 of 1 is displayed.
4. Select the Browse... button in the Top Background

Form Image area. The Specify form image file
dialog opens (defaulting to the \Applications
directory).
5. Select 223022f.tif from the list. Select Open to exit

the dialog. You are returned to the Add Background
Form Images for Sheet 1 of 1 dialog.
6. Select the appropriate Rotation button from those

provided so that the timing marks will be displayed on the left
side of the screen for top sheets or on the right side of the screen
for bottom sheets. The image used in this tutorial is a top
sheet and already has the timing marks on the left, so
no rotation is necessary. Ensure that the top Rotation
button is selected.
NOTE: It is important that the Flip Image / Booklet
Page check box at the bottom of the application
definition window is unchecked when determining
proper rotation.
7. Select OK to exit the dialog. Timing mark and form

ID mark locations are automatically defined from the
background form image. This information is displayed
in text boxes in the lower left-hand half of the dialog
box.
User’s Guide 191

NOTE: The background form image for General

Purpose Answer Sheet (GPAS) 223022 is provided
with ScanTools Plus software. For your
applications, we recommend you have your form
vendor supply background form images.
192 ScanTools Plus

8. On the New Document window, click OK. The color

background form image is displayed on the right-hand
side of the screen. Timing marks are displayed and
numbered along the left side (guide edge) of the image
viewing area. Form ID marks are displayed along the
top (leading edge) in red, which indicates they have
been defined for that specific location.
You have now successfully created a new document and

added a properly rotated background form image.
User’s Guide 193

Creating the Output Format

• Create a new output format.

Terms Output Format: The format for each record in the data
file that is written to during scanning. There is typically a
header field, followed by fields for the grids on the form,
followed by score and totals fields.
Concept An output record format must be created prior to defining
grids on the form so that the scanned data is organized in
the sequence you need.
Procedure 1. Select New from the Output menu to display the
New Output Format dialog.
2. In the Name field, type the name of the output

format. For this tutorial, we will call it Learning
Output Format.
3. Ensure that the Apply Output Format to current

document check box is checked. If not, click the left
mouse button to insert a check mark.
4. Click OK.
You have now successfully created an output record

format.
194 ScanTools Plus

Saving the Application

• Give the application a name and number

• Save the application
Terms Application Number: Every application is required to
have a three digit number associated with it in order to
ensure that it has a unique identifier. If you do not put in a
number, ScanTools will select the next available number in
sequence after the currently displayed application number.
The Windows file name for the application is always a “z,”
followed by the application number, followed by the .sds
suffix (e.g. z100.sds).
Procedure 1. Select Save or Save As from the Application menu.
On the first save, the Save As dialog box will appear
for either command.
2. In the Save As dialog box, type in the title and number

for your application. For this tutorial, in the Title
field, type Learning, and in the Number field, type
100.
3. Click OK.
4. Once an application has been given a name and

number using the Save As dialog box, subsequent
saves can be performed by selecting Application |
User’s Guide 195

Save. This saves the application using the same name

and number by overwriting the previous version.
You have now successfully named and saved the

application.
196 ScanTools Plus

Selecting Document Image Format Settings in the Image Clips Window
Selecting Document Image Format Settings in the Image

Clips Window
• Learn general information regarding image clips and

document image format settings.
• Select the proper settings to define image clips for
post-scan editing and archiving.
Terms Image Clip: Images taken from the scanned sheet so that
a person editing the data can view the sheet or a part of
the sheet without needing to access the paper form. Image
clips can be whole sheet or parts of the sheet (sparse
clipping). It is also possible to archive image clips (both
during and after scanning) for various purposes.
KFI (Key From Image): A post-scan editing process

where the editor views the image in the editor viewer and
then keys in the hand-written information into the allotted
text field.
Merge: When the background form image is brought

together with image clips to provide the user with a
realistic representation of the marked up paper form.
Sparse (individual clips) Clipping mode means that

images of parts of the sheet are saved.
Whole Sheet Clipping mode means that an image of the

whole page is saved to the master clip file.
Concept Image clips, whether whole sheet or sparse, are stored in a
single file during scanning. This file is called the master
clip file. It has a .tif suffix, but cannot be viewed using
normal image viewer programs because it stores multiple
images.
In the Image Clips window, you can select how you want
the clips acquired. You can select between whole sheet or
User’s Guide 197

sparse, and also between grayscale and bitone. The storage

requirements of whole sheet and grayscale images is
considerably larger than part sheet and bitone. It is simply
a matter of selecting the proper formats for the job.
In this lesson, you will be setting parameters that will

affect how the images are stored and how they appear
when viewed. The settings in the Image Clips window
are done on a sheet by sheet basis. Use the spinner in the
top left corner of the window to select the desired sheet.
Procedure Follow the steps below to define document image format
parameters:
1. Select Document | Clips... to open the Image Clips

window.
2. Fix Light Background Images: In some cases, the

background .tif image does not bitone effectively
when merged with a data sheet clip during the
archiving process. Check the Enable Background
Fix check box to enable ScanTools Plus to change the
luminance of the background .tif image so that it will
bitone effectively during archiving, if Bitone is selected
as the Grayscale choice on the Image Clips or Clip
Attributes dialogs.
3. Remove Black from Background: In some cases,

when both the background image and the image clip
contain non-dropout areas, an overlap area can occur
making the resulting image not as clear as possible.
Check the Enable Black Removal check box to
remove the non-dropout black from the background
form image.
4. Paper Size: While the paper size is initially set to 8500

x 11000 (non-rotated size), some forms have sizes like
8500 x 10750. Because of this, ScanTools updates the
paper size directly from the background form image
you add or scan in the New or Select Document
dialogs. The updated dimensions are displayed in the
Horizontal and Vertical fields of the Image Clips
198 ScanTools Plus

dialog. This is done automatically, but because

ScanTools cannot read the dimensions of some .tif
files, it is important that you check to ensure that these
dimensions are correct.
NOTE: If you have metric selected for your
measurement system in Control Panel |
Regional and Language Options in Windows,
your units will appear in MM (millimeters).
5. Background Top Form Image: The name of the

top background form image file that was specified in
the New Document dialog is displayed. In this case,
it is 223022f.tif. You cannot change the background
form image in this dialog.
6. Rotation: The rotation that was specified in the Add

Background Form Image dialog is displayed. You
cannot change background form image rotation in the
Image Clips dialog.
7. Clipping Mode: ScanTools Plus software allows you

to specify whether you want to save an image with
every pixel that passes through the scanner or only
those portions of the image that will be needed later
either for KFI (key from image), edit correction, or
archiving. See the terms section of this lesson for
information on Sparse and Whole Sheet clipping.
For this tutorial, select Sparse from the Clipping

Mode area (this is the default).
NOTE: Because you selected Sparse clipping, neither
the Clip Grayscale nor the Clip Compression
group boxes are enabled in the Image Clips
dialog box. These settings will be specified on the
Clip Attributes dialog during grid definition. If
you had selected Whole sheet, Clip Attributes
User’s Guide 199

would disable compression and grayscale options

at the grid level.
8. Click Close.
9. Select Application | Save to save your work.
You have now successfully set up your document for

sparse clipping.
200 ScanTools Plus

Defining a Field
Defining a Field
• Define a field.
Terms Display Field: When checked, the fields are displayed on
the screen whenever a document is scanned or edited.
More than one field can be defined as a display field;
however, a total of 20 characters can be displayed during
scanning operations. Any fields defined after the 20-
character limit will not appear.
Field: A portion of a data record (e.g. name, birth date,

ID number, etc). Every grid must correspond to a field.
However, not every field has a corresponding grid. Some
fields, such as score and totals fields, contain data from
other sources.
Fixed Length: When checked, you must enter the fixed

length of the field, in characters. If you are defining grids
using the OMR Tool, the length you enter must be as long
as or longer than the field length. When unchecked, the
length of the field is dynamically sized by ScanTools to
contain the data generated by the OMR grid(s) associated
with the field.
Fixed length is required for the following fields:
• date fields
• evaluate fields
• any fields that will store total and/or subtest scores
when scoring.
Grid: A set of response positions on a form that denote

data collection areas.
Concept When you define a field, you are setting aside space in the
output record for data. A field can be alphanumeric,
numeric, 1-digit, 2-digit, date, or evaluate. Most fields have
User’s Guide 201

Defining a Field
grids associated with them for data collection. However,

some fields do not have grids associated with them. These
fields can be used to store other data. A later lesson will
show you how to use a field to store the Score of a test.
In this lesson, you will define the Name field that will
collect the first and last names as well as the middle initial
of the respondents. The field will be alphanumeric.
In subsequent lessons, you will learn how to define grids

using two methods, and how to associate grids with the
field using the Append command.
Procedure Follow the steps below to define the field in the document
record:
1. In the lower left corner of the screen, click New. The

Output Field Entry dialog box is displayed.
2. In the Output Field Entry dialog box, use the

following settings:
• Name = Name.
• Type = Alphanumeric.
• In the Attributes group box, verify that Display
Field is selected.
• Fixed Length = Blank.
202 ScanTools Plus

Defining a Field
3. Click OK. The field has been defined. The next task is
to define grids which will define the response
positions from which data will be collected.
You have now successfully defined a field. In the next

lesson, we will define a grid and then associate it with this
field.
User’s Guide 203

Defining a Grid Using the Background Form Image Method

• Define a grid using the Background Form Image

Method.
Terms Designator: The letter, number, or symbol that can be
found within a bubble.

Mark Style: The mark style represented in the selected

grid. The choices are: bubble, check box (for image
scanners only), or tick mark (for image scanners only).
Orientation: The direction of first response to last

response.
Concept By defining an OMR grid on the background form image,
you define response positions that the scanner can
evaluate as to whether they are filled in or not. The grid
type (alphanumeric, numeric, etc.) should correspond to
the field with which it is associated.
In this lesson, you will define the grid by simply drawing it

right on top of the background form image. This is the
fastest and easiest method to define a grid. However, it is
only possible if a background form image is available.
Another method must be used if a background form
image is not available (or cannot be created using a flatbed
scanner). That method is covered in a later lesson.
Procedure 1. Ensure that the desired (in this case Name) field is
highlighted in the Fields list box in the lower left
corner of the screen.
2. If the OMR Tool dialog box is not displayed, click the

OMR button in the upper left corner of the screen.
204 ScanTools Plus

NOTE: The OMR button may appear as the following

image, depending on your settings in Configure |
Preferences...:
3. In the OMR Tool dialog, use the following settings:
• Type = Alphabetic, no space

• Mark Style = Bubble
• Cell spacing (Cell) = 1
• Timing mark spacing (TM) = 1
• Orientation = Down
4. Move the mouse pointer to the upper left corner of

the Last Name grid. Start at the “A” and not at the
“write-in” boxes. Hold down the left mouse button
and drag the pointer to the lower right corner of the
Last Name grid. Now release the mouse button. The
grid designators will appear blue over the red-orange
designators visible in the background form image.
Your grid should look like the illustration shown on
the next page.
User’s Guide 205

NOTE: If you make a mistake, click the Undo Grid

Definition button; then, try again.
You have now successfully drawn the Last Name grid.

The designators should align with those visible in the
background form image. The arrow shown in the grid
indicates the grid data order.
206 ScanTools Plus

Associating a Grid with a Field using the Append Command

• Associate a grid with a field using the Append

command.
Concept Once the field and grid have been defined, it is necessary
to “associate” the two by appending the grid to the field.
This is done through the Append command. Once
associated, data collected from the grid response positions
is stored in the associated field.
Once a grid has been defined, it must be appended to a

field. If you go to another task without appending, the
grid definition is lost.
NOTE: You can append multiple grids to a single field. Data
is collected in the same order as the grids are listed, so
it is important to properly position the grids within the
list. If necessary, you can drag the grids up and down
in the grid list to the desired location after appending.
Procedure 1. Once the grid has been drawn, ensure that the field
you want to associate to is highlighted in the Fields
list.
2. Click Append to associate the grid with the field.

You have now successfully associated a grid with a field.
User’s Guide 207

Defining a Grid Using the Outline Method

• Outline a grid region on a blank form to help you

place your grid.
• Scan the form to use as a background form image for
application development only.
• Define the grid using the outline as a guide.
• Restore the 223022.tif background form image for use
in the remaining lessons.
Concept If you do not have a background form image, you can
scan a form to use as a background form image. There are
two disadvantages with this method as compared to
getting a background form image from your forms
vendor:
• The dropout colors will not be visible. This means

that the form’s bubbles and designators will not be
visible so that you can easily place your grids.
• The scanned background is not suitable for a
background form merge used in editing and archiving.
If you can live with the above disadvantages, the Outline

Method for grid definition allows for quick application
development.
In this lesson, you will be outlining a single grid for the

sake of the lesson. However, if you were actually creating
an application for a form, you would find it most efficient
to outline all the grids on the form prior to scanning it.
That way, you could define each of the grids without
having to rescan the image.
NOTE: The grid you defined in “Defining a Grid Using the
Background Form Image Method” on page 204 will
be present on your scanned background form image.
Please ignore it for this lesson and focus on the First
Name and M (middle initial) grids.
208 ScanTools Plus

Step 1: Outlining the Grid Region and Scanning the

Form
In this section, you will outline the grid region on the
form so that you can later define the grid using the OMR
Tool. You will also scan the form to use as a background
form image for application development only.
Procedure 1. On a blank General Purpose Answer Sheet (form
number 223022), use a pen or pencil (pencil reads well
when the light source is set to red (ink)) to draw an
outline around the First Name and M grids. Do not
include the write-in area at the top.
2. From the Application Module window, select

Document | Select... from the menu. The Select
Document window will appear.
3. Click the Scan Sheet button. A message box asking if

you want to replace the existing background form
image will appear.
4. Click Yes. The sheet is scanned. Timing mark and

Form ID mark data is updated in the Select
Document window.
User’s Guide 209

5. Click OK in the Select Document window. The

scanned form is displayed and the dropout colors are
not visible.
You have now successfully scanned a sheet to use as a

background form image for application development only.
In the next lesson, you will place a grid inside the outline
that you just created.
NOTE: The scanned background form image can be used
for placing grids, but not for merging, editing, or
archiving.
210 ScanTools Plus

Step 2: Defining a Grid Using the Outline Method

In this section, you will define a grid inside the outline that
you created in the previous section.

NOTE: The OMR button may appear as the following
image, depending on your settings in Configure |
Preferences...:

4. Draw a grid inside the outline that you created in the

previous section. Ensure that your grid is 12
characters wide and that you see designators for A
through Z. Your grid should look like the illustration
shown below.
User’s Guide 211


5. Associate the First Name and M (middle initial) grid

with the Name field by clicking the Append button.
When you have done this, you will have two grids
associated with the Name field.
You have now successfully defined a grid using the

Outline Method and associated that grid with a field. Next
you will do some clean-up before moving on to the next
lesson.
212 ScanTools Plus

Step 3: Restoring the 223022.tif Background Form

Image
Procedure Next, you will re-load the background form image
provided with your ScanTools Plus software so that you
can define grids using the Background Form Image
Method in the remaining lessons.
1. In the Application Module window, select Document

| Select from the menu. The Select Document
window appears.
2. Re-load the background form image as described in

steps 3 to 10 of “Step 2: Creating the New
Document and Adding the Background Form
Image” on page 190.
NOTE: If you have a dual read head scanner, you will
find that there are names for the top and bottom
background form images shown in the text boxes
of the Replace Background Form Image dialog
box. These names were created automatically
when you scanned the sheet. You can delete the
name of the Bottom Background Form Image
if you desire. However, if you do not, it will not
adversely affect the remainder of the lessons.
You have now successfully restored the background form

image and are ready to go to the next lesson.
User’s Guide 213

Defining the Clip Region for a Grid

• Learn what a clip region is.

• Learn two methods for defining a clip region
associated with a grid.
Terms Clip Region: For image scanners only, the area on the
form that will be archived or displayed in the post-scan
editor.
Concept For image scanners only, ScanTools creates an image clip
region associated with every grid. By default, the clip
region and the grid coincide. However, it is often
advantageous to include hand-print areas in the clip
region. This is easily accomplished by expanding the clip
region.
While not as common, it is also possible for the clip

region to be in a completely unrelated part of the form as
the grid. As part of this lesson, we also cover how to do
that.
ScanTools Plus has default settings for the image clips that
are acquired. However, it is a good idea to go through the
settings and optimize them for your purposes. We will do
that in the next lesson.
Procedure 1. Set the Zoom Level control so that the entire grids
for Last Name and First Name and M (Middle
Initial) are visible in the screen.
2. Click on the Last Name grid to select it. It will turn

blue indicating that it is the active grid. (Notice that
the Name field and the 14 character grid are
highlighted in the lower left corner of the screen.)
3. Click the Edit Selected Grid button in the OMR

Tool dialog. The grid will turn a bright blue indicating
that it is ready for editing.
214 ScanTools Plus

4. Next, you will enlarge the clip region for the Last
Name grid to include the handprint boxes above the
bubbles. To do this, place the cursor over the top grid
line and click and drag while pressing the Ctrl key.
When the grid outline is where you want it, release the
left mouse button and the Ctrl key. If you make a
mistake, simply try again.
NOTE: The clip region can also be defined in an area
completely separate from the grid. To do this,
press the Ctrl key, then click and drag a box
anywhere on the form. The resulting clip area is
still associated with the highlighted grid for editing
purposes.
5. Associate the grid and enlarged clip region with the

field by clicking Replace in the lower left corner of
the screen.
User’s Guide 215

NOTE: The Append button label changes to Replace

when editing grids. While the name is different,
they do essentially the same thing.
6. Enlarge the clip region for First Name and M

(Middle Initial) using the same method as described in
steps 2 through 5 except begin by selecting the First
Name and M grid.
You have now successfully re-defined the clip regions for

the two grids.
216 ScanTools Plus

Setting Clip Attributes for Post-Scan Archiving

• Select the appropriate settings for post-scan archiving

using the Clip Attributes window.
Terms Bitone: An image with only two shades: black and white.
Grayscale: An image with up to 256 shades of gray.

Grayscale images have the advantage of being clearer than
bitone images but have the disadvantage of having larger
file sizes.
Post-Scan Image Archiving: The process of archiving

images that were saved in the master clip file during
scanning. Post-scan archiving takes images from the
master clip file and saves them to individual files with
unique names so that they can be viewed with standard
imaging software.
Concept ScanTools Plus has default settings for the image clips that
are acquired. However, it is a good idea to go through the
settings and optimize them for your purposes.
Short explanations of the various settings are provided in

the procedure below. For more detailed information
consult Chapter 8 of the User’s Guide or online Help.
Procedure NOTE: Setting clip attributes is best done at the time you
originally define a grid. However, for the purposes of
this tutorial, we are showing you how to go back and
edit the clip attributes.
1. Select the Last Name grid by clicking on it. It will

turn blue indicating that you have selected it.
2. In the OMR Tool dialog box, click the Edit Selected

Grid button. The grid will turn bright blue.
User’s Guide 217

NOTE: It is important to click Edit Selected Grid

before making changes to the clip attributes. If
you do not, your changes will not be saved.
3. Click the Clip Attributes button in the OMR Tool

dialog.
4. In the Grayscale area, select Bitone (this will keep file

size to a minumum).
5. Ensure that the top radio button is selected in the

Rotation area because no rotation is needed.
6. Select the CCITT G4 Fax radio button for

compression.
NOTE: For Bitone compression, we recommend you
select CCITT Group 4 Fax. For Grayscale
compression, we recommend you select RLE
Packbits. See online help for additional
information.
7. Select Archive this Clip to post-scan archive the

current image clip.
8. Select Combine with Form to combine the

background form image with the clip in the archive
file. Archiving the background form image with the
clip can make certain clips more readable and provides
context for the responses.
218 ScanTools Plus

9. In the File Name Suffix field, type LastName for

the suffix to be assigned to the archive file during
scanning.
10. Click OK.
11. Save the Clip Attributes settings by clicking Replace

in the lower left corner of the screen.
12. Select the First Name and M grid and repeat steps 2
through 12 (above) to select the proper settings for
User’s Guide 219

post-scan archiving. For step 9, use FirstNameM for

the File Name Suffix.
You have now successfully set the clip attributes for the
Last Name and First Name and M grids.
220 ScanTools Plus

Defining a Date Field and the Associated Grids

• Learn how to collect date data using one field and five
grids.
• Associate grids of different types with a single field
with a Date type.
Terms Two Digit Response: A grid type that uses the decimal
characters 01 through 99.

as or longer than the field length generated by ScanTools
from the associated grids. When unchecked, the length of
the field is dynamically sized by ScanTools to contain the
data generated by the OMR grid(s) associated with the
field.
• date fields
• evaluate fields
when scoring.
Concept We will use the five grids listed below to collect data for
the field Birth Date. These grids will be associated with a
single field named Birth Date that is 8 characters long
and of type Date. All five grids will appear under the
BIRTH DATE data area on the General Purpose
Answer Sheet (form #223022).
• The grid for month (MO) will be defined as a

two-digit response grid. (A single row of bubbles will
represent the digits 01 to 12.)
• The first digit of the Day grid will be defined as a
numeric grid (0 to 3).
User’s Guide 221

• The second digit of the Day grid will be defined as a

• The first digit of the Year grid will be defined as a
• The last three digits of the Year grid will be defined as
a numeric grid (0 to 9).
Procedure 1. Define a field called Birth Date as described in
“Defining a Field” on page 201. Use the following
settings:
• Name = Birth Date.

• Type = Date.
• In the Attributes field, be sure no boxes are
checked.
• In the Fixed Length field, click the box to insert
a check mark; type 8.
2. Define grid 1 as described in “Defining a Grid

Using the Background Form Image Method” on
page 204. In the OMR Tool, use the following
settings:
• Type = Two-digit response

3. Click Append to associate grid 1 with the Birth Date

field.
4. Define grids 2 through 5 as described in “Defining a

Grid Using the Background Form Image
Method” on page 204. Click Append after defining
each grid. In the OMR Tool, use the following
settings for each of the grids:
222 ScanTools Plus

• Type = Numeric
You have now successfully defined the Birth Date field

complete with associated grids. However, we have not yet
defined the clip region. That is covered in the next lesson.
User’s Guide 223

Defining a Single Clip Region for Multiple Grids

• Define a single clip region for a five grid data area.

Concept For this tutorial, one of the data areas that we would like
to post-scan archive is the BIRTH DATE data area.
However, this field has five grids associated with it. Rather
than archiving five clip regions, we will set up only the last
grid for post-scan archiving. The other grids we will leave
with their default clip region settings.
NOTE: Even though we are setting up a single clip region
for post-scan archiving, the clip region for each
individual grid will appear during post-scan editing.
Procedure 1. Scroll and adjust the Zoom Level so that the entire
BIRTH DATE data area is visible.
2. Click on the grid defining the last three digits of the

year.
3. Click Edit Selected Grid.
224 ScanTools Plus

4. While holding the Ctrl key, drag the top and left grid
lines so that the entire BIRTH DATE data area is
included in the clip region.
5. Click the Clip Attributes button to display the Clip

Attributes dialog box. Select settings consistent with
those used earlier in “Setting Clip Attributes for
Post-Scan Archiving” on page 217. Use the name
BirthDate for the File Name Suffix in step 9.
Click OK when done.
6. Click the Replace button in the lower left corner of

the screen.

You have now successfully define a single clip region that
covers a five grid data area.
User’s Guide 225

Review of Field and Grid Definition

• Add an ID Number field and grid.

Concept This lesson is used to add the ID Number field and grid
so that your application is consistent with the General
Purpose Answer Sheet and the 801 Sample Application.
This lesson is review and covers no new material.
Procedure 1. Define the ID Number field by clicking New in the
lower left corner of the screen. In the Output Field
Entry dialog, use the following settings:
• Name = ID Number
• Type = Numeric
• No boxes should be checked in Attributes.
• Fixed Length = Blank
2. Click OK.
3. Define the grid as described in “Defining a Grid

settings:
• Type = Numeric
NOTE: The 801 Sample Application does not have the

clip region enlarged to include the hand-print area
226 ScanTools Plus

so we will leave the clip region as defined by

default in this lesson.
4. Click the Append button in the lower left corner of

the screen.
5. Select Application | Save to save the application.
6. You have now successfully add the ID Number field

and grid to make your application consistent with the
801 Sample Application.
User’s Guide 227

Defining and Using a Translate Table

• Create a translate table.

• Define a field and grid using a user-defined data type.
Terms Translate Table: A table used to store values for a user
defined data type. For example, the translate table for the
type Gender that we will use in this lesson includes
Female and Male.
Concept The Gender grid offers the respondent two choices, F or
M. Marking one or the other writes the words Female or
Male to the data record.
Since Gender is not a standard data type available in

ScanTools Plus software, you will need to create a custom
data type by using a translate table.
Step 1: Defining a Translate Table

Procedure 1. In the upper left corner of the screen, click the
Translate button. The Translate Tool dialog box is
displayed.
NOTE: The Translate button may appear as the
following image, depending on your settings in
Configure | Preferences...:
2. Click the Add Table button in the top part of the

dialog box. The Add Translate Table dialog box is
displayed.
228 ScanTools Plus

3. Type the name of the table in the Name field. For this
tutorial, type Gender.
4. Click OK to close the Add Translate Table dialog

box.
5. At the bottom of the Translate tool dialog box, click

the Add Entry button. The Translate Table Entry
NOTE: For an explanation of the Omit and Multiple
responses, consult the online Help system.
6. The Response Position field is prefilled with 1,

indicating that you are about to enter the character or
string to assign to the first bubble in the grid. In the
Translate String: field, type Female.
7. Click OK.
8. Click the Add Entry button again. The Translate

Table Entry dialog box is displayed.
9. Now the Response Position field is prefilled with 2,

string to assign to the second bubble in the grid. In the
Translate String field, type Male.
User’s Guide 229

10. Click OK.

the Close button.
You have now successfully created a translate table of type

Gender. Gender will now be available in the Type
drop-down list in the OMR Tool for every document in
the application.
Step 2: Using a Translate Table When Defining a Field

and Grid
Procedure Use the following steps to define the Gender field, grid,
and clip region in the document record:
230 ScanTools Plus

1. Define the field as described in “Defining a Field”

on page 201. Use the following settings in the Output
Field Entry dialog box:
• Name = Gender.
2. Click OK.

page 204. Use the following settings in the OMR
Tool:
• Type = Gender

Gender for the File Name Suffix in step 9. Click
OK when done.

the screen to define the grid and clip attributes.
User’s Guide 231

NOTE: Notice that the grid width in the Grids list is “6.”
This is to accommodate the longest string which is
Female.
You have now successfully defined a grid for a user-

defined data type.
232 ScanTools Plus

Defining Linked Grids

• Define a field for Education using the technique

learned in “Defining a Field” on page 201.
• Learn how to define a linked grid for the two-columns
of responses.
Terms Linked Grids: Two or more separate grids that have a
continued set of response designators between them.
Concept In some cases, there is not enough room to put all
responses for a question in a single column or row. When
this occurs, use a linked grid to continue the responses
from one grid to the next.
Procedure 1. Define the Education field as described in
“Defining a Field” on page 201. In the Output
Field Entry dialog box, use the following settings:
• Name = Education.
• Type = Numeric.
2. Click OK.
3. Define the Education grid by first ensuring that the

field name is highlighted in the box in the lower left

OMR Tool in the upper left corner of the screen.
5. In the OMR Tool dialog box, use the following

settings:
• Type = Two-digit response
User’s Guide 233


6. Draw the first grid on top of the left column for the
GRADE or EDUCATION data area. The numbers
1 through 8 will be placed.
7. In the OMR Tool dialog box, click the Add Link to

Grid button. Use the same settings as step 5 above for
the second grid.
8. Draw the second grid on top of the right column in

the GRADE or EDUCATION data area. The
numbers 9 through 16 (although the “1” for the tens
digit will not appear) will be placed.
9. Associate the linked grids with the Education field by

clicking Append in the lower left corner of the screen.
You have now successful defined linked grids and

associated them with a field that you defined.
234 ScanTools Plus

Defining a Clip Region for Linked Grids

• Learn about clip regions associated with linked grids.

• Define a clip region for two grids that are linked.
• Learn that you cannot edit linked grids.
Concept The linked grids in this lesson are different from the
multiple grids that we saw in “Defining a Single Clip
Region for Multiple Grids” on page 224. Linked
grids have only a single clip region that is associated
with the last grid placed. In the case of the multiple
grids that were placed in “Review of Field and Grid
Definition” on page 226, each of the five grids placed
still had a clip region associated with it.
Although linked grids and multiple grids differ in this way,

we will treat them similarly in this tutorial. We will use the
last field placed to define the clip region for the entire data
area. In other words, we will expand the clip region for the
last field placed so that it also covers the other grid that is
linked.
Another trait of linked grids is that they cannot be edited.

This means that if you realize that you’ve made a mistake
(or more likely that you forgot to expand the clip region)
after clicking Append, you will need to Cut the grids, then
re-define them. In this lesson, we will Cut (delete) the
grids, then re-define them using the techniques learned in
Lesson “Defining Linked Grids” on page 233.
Finally, we will define the clip region before clicking
Append.
Procedure 1. Scroll and adjust the Zoom Level so that the entire
GRADE or EDUCATION data area is visible.
2. Click on either of the two grids for GRADE or

EDUCATION to highlight both grids.
User’s Guide 235

3. Click Cut in the lower left corner of the screen to

remove both grids.
4. Re-define the two grids using the same procedure as in
steps 3 through 8 of “Defining Linked Grids” on
page 233, but do not click Append. (If you accidentally
click Append, you will need to go back to step 2 of
this lesson because linked grids cannot be edited).
5. The next step is to define the clip region. For this
lesson, we will define the clip region from scratch
rather than enlarging the existing clip region of the last
grid defined. While holding the Ctrl key, draw a box
that outlines the entire GRADE or EDUCATION
data area. This sets the clip region for the last linked
grid defined.

Education for the File Name Suffix in step 9.
Click OK when done.
the screen.
You have now successfully defined a clip region for two

linked grids.
236 ScanTools Plus

Defining Grids Using Copy and Paste

Use Copy and Paste to define grids for the Part One and
Part Two fields.
Terms Clipboard: A place in your computer’s memory that an
item can be copied to and pasted from.
Ctrl+C: The keyboard shortcut for the Copy command.

Copy a grid to the Clipboard by typing a “c” while holding
the Ctrl key.
Ctrl+V: The keyboard shortcut for the Paste command.

Paste a grid from the Clipboard by typing a “v” while
holding the Ctrl key.
Concept The Clipboard is a Windows feature that can be used in
many Windows programs including ScanTools Plus. When
you have multiple grids that are the same size, you can
save time in defining them by copying, pasting, and
repositioning. If you are careful about highlighting the
correct field in the fields list, you can even copy grids from
one field to another field. We will do just that in this
lesson.
Another time saver in copying and pasting grids is that all

Clip Attribute settings are copied except for Archive this
Clip and the File Name Suffix (naturally, these need to be
defined for each grid). Just be sure to have the proper
settings selected on the original, before copying and
pasting.
Step 1: Defining the Two Fields

Procedure 1. In the lower left corner of the screen, click the New
button. The Output Field Entry dialog box is
displayed.
User’s Guide 237


following settings:
• Name = Part One

• Type = 1-Digit
• Fixed Length = Blank
3. Click OK.
4. To create the field Part Two, repeat the procedure

(steps 1 through 3), but name the field Part Two.
You have now successfully defined the fields Part One

and Part Two.
Step 2: Defining the Two Grids That Will Be Copied:

Procedure 1. Select (highlight) the Part One field.

3. In the OMR Tool, use the following settings:

• Orientation = Right
4. Draw the grid on response positions 1 through 16

using the technique learned in “Defining a Grid
Using the Background Form Image Method”
on page 204.
238 ScanTools Plus

5. The next step is to set the clip attributes. We will not

be setting these grids up for post-scan archiving.
However, we do want the clip regions visible for
editing. Click the Clip Attributes button. Use the
following settings for proper viewing in the editor and
to help keep the size of the master clip file small:
• Grayscale = Bitone
• Compression = CCITT G4 Fax
• Rotation = Up
• Dynamic Threshold Data Type for Bitone Clips =
Mixed/Handprint (This is the most flexible
type.)
• Bitone Edge Contrast Enhancement = Checked
(To remove shadows around dark areas.)
NOTE: For more information on specific topics such as

Dynamic Threshold Data Type for Bitone Clips or
Bitone Edge Contrast Enhancement, consult the
online Help system.
6. Click OK.
7. Click Append to associate the grid with the Part One

field.
User’s Guide 239

8. Repeat steps 1 through 7 for the second grid which

covers response positions 17 through 33.
You now have successfully defined the two grids that will
be copied complete with clip attribute settings. Next you
will copy these grids to other locations on the form and to
multiple fields.
Step 3: Copying and Pasting Grids to Other Positions

and to Multiple Fields
Procedure 1. Click on the second grid (response positions 17
through 33) to highlight the grid.
2. Click the Copy button or press Ctrl+c. The grid is

now no longer highlighted.
240 ScanTools Plus

3. Ensure that the Part One field in the fields list and the
second grid in the grids list are both highlighted.
4. Next, click the Paste button or press Ctrl+v. The grid

over response positions 17 through 35 will turn pink.
This indicates that a grid has been pasted into that
position.
5. Click and hold down the left mouse button in the

center of the grid. Drag the grid so that it is positioned
directly over response positions 34 through 50 and
then release the mouse button. If you make a mistake,
simply click and drag until the grid is properly
positioned.
6. Click Append to associate the grid with the Part One

field.
User’s Guide 241

You have now successfully defined the grid for positions

34 through 50 complete with clip attributes. Next, we will
place the grid for positions 51 through 66. Remember, this
grid needs to be associated with the Part Two field.
7. Click on the grid over response positions 1 through

16. The grid will be highlighted. In addition, notice
that the Part One field in the fields list and the first
grid in the grids list are also highlighted.
8. Click the Copy button to copy the grid to the

clipboard. The grid is no longer highlighted.
9. Before we paste, it is important to highlight the

correct field. Click on the Part Two field in the fields
list. Notice that there are no grids in the grids list.
10. Click the Paste button to paste the grid over response
positions 1 through 16.
11. Click and drag the grid that you just pasted to the
proper position over response positions 51 through
66.
12. Click Append to associate the grid with the Part Two
field.
You have now successfully copied a grid from one field

and pasted it to a different field. In the steps that follow,
we will do that two more times to complete grid
placement for the Part One and Part Two fields.
13. Click on the grid over response positions 17 through

33.
14. Click the Copy button to copy the grid.
15. Click on the Part Two field to ensure that the grids
will be appended to the correct field.
16. Click Paste, then drag the grid to the appropriate

position over response positions 67 through 83.
242 ScanTools Plus

field.
NOTE: The grid is still on the clipboard, so there is no
need to copy the grid a second time.
18. Click Paste, then drag the grid to the appropriate

position over response positions 84 through 100.
field.
You have now successfully defined and associated all grids

with the Part One and Part Two fields.
User’s Guide 243

Defining a “Comments” Field and Grid

• Define a field for write-in comments.

• Define a graybox grid.
• Select the appropriate clip attributes.
Terms Graybox (standard): A defined region of a form that is
evaluated for the presence of data. If there is data, the clip
is stored in the master clip file. The resulting images can
be viewed during post-scan editing or they can be archived
with unique file names.
KFI (Key From Image): A post-scan editing process

where the editor views the image in the editor viewer and
then keys the hand-written information into the allotted
text field.
Concept Grayboxes are most often used to collect hand print data
from forms. They are often used with the comments
section. A common post-scan activity is KFI editing,
where the image is displayed in the viewer, and the editor
types the hand-written response into the field provided.
Grayboxes can also be used with the optional Real Time
character recognition module, although a discussion of
those topics is beyond the scope of this tutorial.
In this lesson, you will define the field and grid, then select
the appropriate graybox and clip attribute settings.
Step 1: Defining the Field

displayed.
2. In the Output Field Entry, use the following settings:
• Name = Comments
244 ScanTools Plus

• The Fixed Length check box must be checked
and the length of the field equal to or greater than
the number of characters specified in the output
length field on the Graybox tool -- in this case 99.
3. Click the OK button.
You have now successfully defined the field that will store
the data for the Comments grid.
Step 2: Defining the Grid and Selecting the Clip

Attributes
Procedure In this procedure, we will be defining the grid and setting
up the grid for post-scan archiving.
1. Click the Graybox button in the upper left corner of

the screen.
NOTE: The Graybox button may appear as the
following image, depending on your settings in
Configure | Preferences...:
2. Set the Cutoff Value to 5. With this setting, ScanTools

will consider any mark with a mark read value equal to
or greater than 5 as data and will save the grid region
to the master clip file. If no marks equal to or greater
than 5 are present, no image will be saved.
3. Set the Output Length value to 99. This sets the

number of characters reserved in the output record
for the data derived from the graybox grid. With this
value set to 99, the editor will be able to type up to 99
characters into the field during post-scan editing.
User’s Guide 245

4. Leave the Enable Conditional Clipping for Image

Archiving check box unchecked because we will be
archiving a Comments grid for each form scanned. If
it was checked, archiving would occur only for those
grayboxes with marks in them.
5. In the Unit of Measurement list box, select Cell,

Timing Mark.

Comments for the File Name Suffix in step 9.
Click OK when done.
7. Move the mouse pointer to the upper left corner of

the grid; hold the left button down; drag the pointer to
the lower right corner; and release the mouse button.
NOTE: Notice in the illustration below, that the graybox
is drawn below the word “- Comments -”. This
246 ScanTools Plus

was done intentionally so that the title of the box

is not interpreted as marks within the box.

the screen to associate the grid with the Comments
field.
9. Select Application | Save from the menu to save

your work.
You have now successfully defined a Comments field and

associated a graybox grid with it. When marks with a value
equal to or greater than 5 appear in the box, an image of
the graybox grid will be saved to the master clip file.
NOTE: If desired, the saved images could also be used for
post-scan editing or ICR/OCR processing.
User’s Guide 247

Defining a Score Field

• Define a field for the Score of the General Purpose

Answer Sheet
Terms 1- or 2- Digit Field Data Types: 1- or 2-Digit field data
types are required for items that will be scored. The items
to be scored must also be marked on the associated key
sheet. If you specify 1- or 2-Digit field data type for items
you do not wish to score, do not mark these items on a
key sheet.
Score: A number associated with the number of

responses on a scanned form that match the answer key.
Concept Up to this point, every field we created in the Output
Record has had one or more grids associated with it.
However, in this lesson, we will create a field that does not
have a grid associated with it. Instead, we will use the field
to store the value of the score of scanned forms.
Scoring can be done online, or as a post-scan activity that

is accessed through the main ScanTools window. The
ScanTools score module allows you to score multiple-
choice and true/false tests through the use of 1- or 2- digit
field data types. Scoring consists of determining correct
and incorrect responses by comparing the test data to key
data. The key data can be stored in the profile, or can be
scanned online.
The actual scoring process is beyond the scope of this

tutorial. The following describes how to set up the Score
field.
1. In the lower left corner of the screen, click the New

displayed.
248 ScanTools Plus


following settings:
• Name = Score
• Type = Numeric.
• Fixed Length = 6 for this example. A total score
requires a minimum of 5, and a subtest score requires
a minimum of 4.
3. Click OK. Score* is displayed in the field list in the

lower left corner. The asterisk indicates that it is a field
with no grids associated with it.
You have just successfully defined a field to store score

data.
User’s Guide 249

Releasing for Scanning and Saving the Application

• Ready your application for scanning by checking

• Exit the Application Module.
• Save your work on a removable media by creating an
application diskette.
Concept In this lesson, we will wrap up application definition. The
fields for the data file have been created. The grids have
been placed and associated with the appropriate fields.
Clip regions have been defined for both post-scan editing
and image archiving. All that remains is to release the
application for scanning, and to save the application to a
removable media for archiving, to move to a different
computer, or for distribution.
Procedure 1. When all fields and grids are defined, your application
is ready to be released for scanning. To do this, select
Application | Settings. The Application Settings
2. Check the Release for scanning check box so that

the application can be scanned.
3. Click OK to continue. You are returned to the

Application Module.
4. Select Application | Exit to exit the Application
Module.
5. To save your application, select Configure | Make

Application Disk.... The Make Application Disk
dialog box appears.
6. Highlight your new application by selecting 100 -

Learning Document.
250 ScanTools Plus

7. To save all components of your application, check all

boxes in the Copy Input/Configuration Files of
Type and the Copy Output/Produced Files of
Type groups.
8. In the Copy To text box, enter the drive letter and

directory that you wish to copy the application to.
9. Click OK to continue. The Copy Application Files

dialog box appears.
10. Hold down the Ctrl key, then click to highlight those
files that you would like copied to the drive and
directory you chose in step 8. (We recommend
copying them all.) To de-select a file, simply click on it
again while holding the Ctrl key.
11. When you have selected the files you wish to copy,
click the Copy button to copy the files.
You have now successfully released your application for

scanning and saved your application to disk. That
concludes this tutorial.
User’s Guide 251

If You Need More Practice

Talk with your Scantron representative about additional
training services and materials available or visit our Web
site at www.scantron.com.
Custom application development is available through the

Scantron Services Group by calling 1-800-338-5544.
252 ScanTools Plus

B
In this chapter:
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 253
Preparing the 701 Sample Application as a Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 257
Creating a New Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 264
Creating a New Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 265
Creating the Output Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 270
Saving the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 271
Defining a Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 273
Defining a Grid Using the Background Form Image Method . . . . . . . . . . . page 276
Associating a Grid with a Field using the Append Command . . . . . . . . . . . page 279
Defining a Grid Using the Corners Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 280
Defining a Date Field and the Associated Grids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 287
Defining and Using a Translate Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 290
Defining Linked Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 294
Defining Grids Using Copy and Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 296
Defining a Score Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 304
Releasing for Scanning and Saving the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 306
If You Need More Practice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 308
Appendix B:
for an OMR Scanner
Introduction
This tutorial is intended to help you successfully define an
OMR application using the ScanTools Plus Application
Module. In this tutorial, you will start with a General
Purpose Answer Sheet No. 221681 that has been designed
for data collection. From there, you will define fields,
grids, and translate tables using the ScanTools Plus
Application Module. When you are done, you will have a
ScanTools application that is ready to scan for data
collection.
This exercise is intended for use as an instructional aid for

first-time users as well as a reference for experienced
users. It is for use with OMR scanners only.
User’s Guide 253

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner
Introduction
WARNING: This tutorial cannot be run on EZData scanners.
NOTE: If you have questions about the steps you are

performing, press the F1 key on your keyboard to
display context-sensitive help for the active window or
dialog box.
Before You Begin

• You should know how to use the Microsoft Windows
operating system.
• Your scanner, utility software, and ScanTools Plus
software (Application Development or Application
Development with Scoring variants) must be installed.
• You should know the characteristics of your scanner.
This tutorial applies to Scantron iNSIGHT 2/4 OMR
only scanners and OpScan OMR Scanners.
• You should give special attention to Chapter 1,
“Overview” and Chapter 3, “Creating an Application”
of this manual.
• You must have several blank copies of General
Purpose Answer Sheet No. 221681 (that came with
your ScanTools Plus software).
General Purpose Answer Sheet No. 221681

This tutorial uses the General Purpose Answer Sheet No.
221681 (as shown below). This two-sided form can also
be used for many real-world purposes including:
254 ScanTools Plus

Introduction
• Demographic information (e.g., name, birth date,

identification number) or
• Questions (200 items) used for tests, surveys, or
questionnaires
User’s Guide 255

Introduction
256 ScanTools Plus

Preparing the 701 Sample Application as a Reference

In the lessons that follow this one, you will define from
scratch an application for the General Purpose Answer
Sheet No. 221681. A similar, ready made application
created by ScanTools experts comes standard with
ScanTools Plus. In this lesson we will prepare this
completed sample application so that you can use it as a
reference while you are working on the tutorial
application.
• Select the 701 Sample Application using ScanTools

Plus
• Migrate the application to ScanTools Plus. (It was
originally a ScanTools for Windows application and
must be updated to the new format.)
• Select the correct document within the 701 application
• Add background form images to make the application
more user-friendly
Terms Application: The ScanTools file where your application
definition is saved. Application files are saved in the
\Applications directory (default location is C:\Program
Files\Scantron\ScanTools Plus\Applications) with
an .sds suffix. An application can hold up to 255
documents.
Background Form Image: A digital representation of a

printed form in .tif format. Your forms vendor typically
provides this file. It is loaded into ScanTools Plus and
provides a visual representation of the form on which
grids can be placed. It can also be merged with scanned
data for editing and archiving purposes so that the user
has a more true-to-life representation of the form.
Document: One or more sheets that, when scanned,

produce one document record in a data file. A document
User’s Guide 257

can hold up to 99 sheets. The document definition

describes the document.
Step 1: Selecting the 701 Sample Application

Procedure To select this completed application, perform the
following:

Programs list. Doing so starts the ScanTools Plus
software and displays the ScanTools Plus main
window.
2. Select Application | Select... from the menu bar.
3. Select 701 - Sample Application from the list box.
4. Click OK. The application is selected but is not yet

ready for use as a reference. First you must migrate the
application, select the correct document, and add the
background form images.
258 ScanTools Plus

Step 2: Migrating the 701 Sample Application

Procedure 1. Select Application | Open. The Application
Migration Options dialog box will appear.
2. Accept the default settings (as shown in the

illustration above) by clicking OK. The following
message box appears:
User’s Guide 259

3. Click Yes to continue. The 701 application is saved in

the ScanTools Plus format and the ScanTools Plus 701
application definition window opens. However, form
No. 221681 is not shown until you select the correct
document.
Step 3: Selecting the Correct Document within the

Application
Procedure 1. From the ScanTools Plus application definition
window menu bar, select Document | Select. The
Select Document dialog box will appear.
260 ScanTools Plus

2. At the Title drop-down combo box, select GPAS

#221681 Tutorial from the drop-down list.
Step 4: Adding the Background Form Images

Procedure 1. In the Select Document dialog box, click the Add All
Images button. The Add Background Images for
Sheet 1 of 1 dialog box will appear.
2. Click the Browse button in the Top Background

Form Image group box. You will see a list of .tif files
in the C:\Program Files\Scantron\ScanTools
Plus\Applications directory. Select 2216811.tif and
click Open. The Add Background Images for
Sheet 1 of 1 dialog box will reappear with the File
Name box populated.
3. Click the Browse button in the Bottom Background

Form Image group box. The same list of .tif files will
reappear. This time select 2216812.tif and click Open.
The Add Background Images for Sheet 1 of 1
dialog box will reappear as shown below:
4. Click OK. The Select Document dialog box will

reappear.
User’s Guide 261

5. Click OK to load the two background form images.

The top background form image with the grid
definitions superimposed will appear as shown below:
6. Select Application | Save to save the application with

the background form images added.
7. You can adjust the size of the image display by moving

the zoom level slider. You can also adjust the
transparency of the background form image and the
262 ScanTools Plus

grid definions (as well as other elements) by clicking

Design Settings.
If you have questions during the tutorial, this 701 Sample

Application is available for you as a reference or to check
your work. The application can also be used for real-world
jobs including tests, surveys, or questionnaires.
Next, we will be creating a similar application from

scratch. To do this, proceed to the next lesson.
NOTE: We recommend that you perform the following
lessons exactly as described in the tutorial so that the
application you define through the lessons is identical
to that in the 701 Sample Application.
User’s Guide 263


• Create a new application consistent with the GPAS

#221681 Tutorial document in the 701 Sample
Application.
• Select the appropriate Application Settings.
Procedure NOTE: You need to use your scanner for this procedure.
Make sure that it has been set up properly and that the
power is turned on.

Programs list. This starts the ScanTools Plus software
and displays the ScanTools Plus main window.
2. Select Application | New from the menu. This

displays the ScanTools Plus application definition
window.
3. Select Application | Settings from the menu. The

Application Settings dialog box appears.
4. Uncheck the Release for scanning check box. An

application is not ready to be released for scanning
until an output format and at least one field has been
defined. We will check this box in a later lesson when
the application is complete.
Disregard the remainder of the settings in the
Application Settings dialog box as they are for image
(not OMR only) scanners.
5. Click OK.
You have now successfully set the initial settings for your
264 ScanTools Plus


• Create a new document.

• Add a Background Form Image.
• Ensure that Background Form Image Rotation is
correct.
Terms Form ID Marks: Small black rectangles usually at the top
of the form that uniquely identify it. ScanTools Plus
requires that each sheet in an application has a unique
form ID mark.
Timing Marks: A column of small black rectangles that

follow the guide edge of the form. Each timing mark
indicates to the scanner a row in which response bubbles
can be positioned.
Step 1: Checking Image Orientation

Prepare for document creation by first viewing the
background form image to determine the location of the
timing marks.
Procedure 1. Using Windows Explorer, find the two background
form images for this exercise that came with your
ScanTools Plus software. They are in directory
C:\Program Files\Scantron\ScanTools
Plus\Applications with file names 2216811.tif and
2216812.tif.
2. Open the first file using an imaging program (like

Microsoft Paint) by selecting 2216811.tif. Right click
and select Open With. Select Microsoft Paint from
the list by left clicking. The image will be displayed in
User’s Guide 265

the Paint program. Note the position of the timing

marks. (They are on the left side of the image.)
3. Open the 2216812.tif file in the same manner as you

did the first file. Notice that the timing marks are on
the right for this file.
You have now successfully determined the position of the

timing marks for the background form images. That
information will be important to you when you add the
background form image to your new document in the
next section.
Step 2: Creating the New Document and Adding the

Background Form Image
Next we need to create the document and add the
background form image. Knowing the location of the
timing marks is important because we will need to specify
Rotation during this process.
Procedure 1. Select New from the Document menu to display the
New Document dialog.
266 ScanTools Plus

2. In the Title field, type the name of the document. For

this tutorial, we will call it Learning Document.
3. In the Options section of the New Document dialog

box, click Add All Images. The dialog Add
Background Form Images for Sheet 1 of 1 is
displayed.
4. Select the Browse... button in the Top Background

Form Image area. The Specify form image file
dialog opens (defaulting to the \Applications
directory).
5. Select 2216811.tif from the list. Select Open to exit

Form Images for Sheet 1 of 1 dialog with the File
Name box populated.
6. Select the Browse... button in the Bottom

Background Form Image area. The Specify form
image file dialog opens (defaulting to the
\Applications directory).
7. Select 2216812.tif from the list. Select Open to exit

Form Images for Sheet 1 of 1 dialog with the File
Name box populated.
8. Select the appropriate Rotation buttons from those

provided so that the timing marks will be displayed on the left
side of the screen for top sheets or on the right side of the screen
for bottom sheets. The background form images must be
rotated to the scanned orientation for ScanTools Plus
to find the form ID and timing marks.
The images used in this tutorial already have their

timing marks in the correct locations, so no rotation is
necessary. Ensure that the top Rotation button for
each file is selected.
NOTE: It is important that the Flip Image / Booklet
Page check box at the bottom of the application
User’s Guide 267

definition window is unchecked when determining

proper rotation.
9. Select OK to exit the dialog. Timing mark and form

ID mark locations are automatically defined from the
background form image. This information is displayed
in text boxes in the lower left half of the New
Document dialog box.
NOTE: The background form images for General
Purpose Answer Sheet No. 221681 are provided
with ScanTools Plus software. For your
applications, we recommend you have your form
vendor supply background form images.
268 ScanTools Plus

10. In the New Document dialog box, click OK. The

color background form image for the top sheet is
displayed in the grid definition area (right side of the
screen). Timing marks are displayed and numbered
along the left side (guide edge). Form ID marks are
displayed along the top (leading edge) in red, which
indicates they have been defined for that specific
location.
You have now successfully created a new document and

added a properly rotated background form image.
User’s Guide 269


• Create a new output format.

Terms Output Format: The format for each record in the data
file that is written to during scanning. There is typically a
header field, followed by fields for the grids on the form,
followed by score and totals fields, if applicable.
Concept An output record format must be created prior to defining
grids on the form so that the scanned data is organized in
the sequence you need.
Procedure 1. Select New from the Output menu to display the
New Output Format dialog.
2. In the Name field, type the name of the output

format. For this tutorial, we will call it Learning
Output Format.
3. Ensure that the Apply Output Format to current

document check box is checked. If not, click the left
mouse button to insert a check mark.
4. Click OK.
You have now successfully created an output record

format. Notice in the lower left corner of the screen that
the Output is now defined as Learning Output Format.
270 ScanTools Plus


• Give the application a name and number

• Save the application
Terms Application Number: Every application is required to
have a three-digit number associated with it in order to
ensure that it has a unique identifier. If you do not put in a
number, ScanTools will select the next available number in
sequence after the currently displayed application number.
The Windows file name for the application is always a “z,”
followed by the application number, followed by the .sds
suffix (e.g. z100.sds).
Procedure 1. Select Save or Save As from the Application menu.
On the first save, the Save As dialog box will appear
for either command.
2. Because we have not defined any output fields, the

APP4153 message box will appear asking if you want
to save. Click Yes to continue.
3. In the Save As dialog box, type in the title and number

for your application. For this tutorial, in the Title
field, type Learning, and in the Number field, type
700.
User’s Guide 271

NOTE: If the number 700 has been used, select the next
sequential number.
4. Click OK.
5. Once an application has been given a name and

number using the Save As dialog box, subsequent
saves can be performed by selecting Application |
Save. This saves the application using the same name
and number by overwriting the previous version.
You have now successfully named and saved the

application.
272 ScanTools Plus

Defining a Field
Defining a Field
• Define a field.
Terms NOTE: The following terms are found in the Ouput Field
Entry dialog box.
Display Field: When checked, the fields are displayed on

the screen whenever a document is scanned or edited.
More than one field can be defined as a display field;
however, a total of 20 characters can be displayed during
scanning operations. Any fields defined after the
20-character limit will not appear.
Field: A portion of a data record (e.g. name, birth date,

ID number, etc). Every grid must correspond to a field.
However, not every field has a corresponding grid. Some
fields, such as score and totals fields, contain data from
other sources.

as or longer than the field length. When unchecked, the
length of the field is dynamically sized by ScanTools to
contain the data generated by the grid(s) associated with
the field.
• date fields
• evaluate fields
when scoring.

User’s Guide 273

Defining a Field
Concept When you define a field, you are setting aside space in the
output record for data. A field can be alphanumeric,
numeric, 1-digit, 2-digit, date, or evaluate. Most fields have
grids associated with them for data collection. However,
some fields do not have grids associated with them. These
fields can be used to store other data. A later lesson will
show you how to use a field to store the Score of a test.
In this lesson, you will define the Name field that will
collect the first and last names as well as the middle initial
of the respondents. The field will be alphanumeric.
In subsequent lessons, you will learn how to define grids

using two methods, and how to associate grids with the
field using the Append command.
record:


following settings:
• Name = Name.
• In the Attributes group box, verify that Display
Field is selected.
274 ScanTools Plus

Defining a Field
• Fixed Length = Unchecked.
3. Click OK. This defines the field. Notice that Name*

appears in the Fields list in the lower left corner of
the screen. The asterisk indicates that Name is a field
which has no grids associated with it. The next task is
to define a grid which will define the response
positions from which data will be collected.
You have now successfully defined a field. In the next

lesson, we will define a grid and then associate it with the
Name field.
User’s Guide 275


• Define a grid using the Background Form Image

Method.
Terms Designator: The letter, number, or symbol that can be
found within a bubble.

Mark Style: The mark style represented in the selected

grid. The choices are: bubble, check mark (for image
scanners only), or tick mark (for image scanners only).
Orientation: The direction of first response to last

response.
Concept By defining an OMR grid on the background form image,
you define response positions that the scanner can
evaluate as to whether they are filled in or not. The grid
type (alphanumeric, numeric, etc.) should correspond to
the field with which it is associated.
In this lesson, you will define the grid by simply drawing it

right on top of the background form image. This is the
fastest and easiest method to define a grid. However, it is
only possible if a background form image is available.
Another method must be used if a background form
image is not available (or cannot be created using a flatbed
scanner). That method is covered in a later lesson.

276 ScanTools Plus

• Type = Alphanumeric
• Orientation = Left
4. Move the mouse pointer to the upper right corner of

the Name grid (while Last Name, First Name, and MI
are shown separately, we will be treating them as a
single Name grid). Start at the blank bubble and not at
the “write-in” boxes. Hold down the left mouse
button and drag the pointer to the lower left corner of
the Name grid. Now release the mouse button. The
grid designators will appear blue over the orange
designators visible in the background form image.
Your grid should look like the illustration shown on
the next page.
User’s Guide 277


You have now successfully drawn the Name grid. The

designators should align with those visible in the
background form image. The arrow shown in the grid
indicates the grid data order.
278 ScanTools Plus


• Associate a grid with a field using the Append

command.
Concept Once the field and grid have been defined, it is necessary
to “associate” the two by appending the grid to the field.
This is done through the Append command. Once
associated, data collected from the grid response positions
is stored in the associated field.
Once a grid has been defined, it must be appended to a

field. If you go to another task without appending, the
grid definition is lost.
NOTE: You can append multiple grids to a single field. Data
is collected in the same order as the grids are listed, so
it is important to properly position the grids within the
list. If necessary, you can drag the grids up and down
in the Grids list to the desired location after
appending.
Procedure 1. Once the grid has been drawn, ensure that the field
you want to associate to is highlighted in the Fields
list.
2. Click Append (in the lower left corner of the screen)

to associate the grid with the field. Notice that the grid
is now listed in the Grids list as a grid 21 characters
long with an alphanumeric type. Notice also that the
Name field is highlighted which indicates that it is
associated wtih the Name grid.
You have now successfully associated a grid with a field.
User’s Guide 279

Defining a Grid Using the Corners Method

• Define a field.
• Mark the corners of a grid region on a blank form to
help you place your grid.
• Scan the form to use as a background form image for
application development only.
• Define the grid using the corners as a guide.
• Restore the 2216811.tif and 2216812.tif background
form images for use in the remaining lessons.
Concept While we strongly recommend getting a background form
image from your forms vendor, you may run into a
situation where you need to define an application without
a background form image. In those situations, you will
need to use a different method for grid placement than
the one you just learned.
This lesson will show you how to define a grid without a

background form image. It is called the “Corners
Method.”
There are two disadvantages associated with this method:
• It takes longer than the background form image

method.
• The form’s dropout colors will not be visible. This
means that you will not be able to use the form’s
bubbles and designators for grid placement.
In this lesson, you will be defining a single grid for the

sake of the lesson. However, if you were actually defining
an application for a form, you would find it most efficient
to mark all the grids on the form prior to scanning it. That
way, you could define each of the grids without having to
rescan the image.
280 ScanTools Plus

NOTE: The grid you defined in “Defining a Grid Using the

Background Form Image Method” on page 276, will
be present on your scanned background form image.
Please ignore it for this lesson and focus on the
Identification Number grid.
Step 1: Defining the Field

Before we can place the grid, we must define the field. We
will be using the same method that we used in “Defining a
Field” on page 273.
record:


following settings:
• Name = Ident
• Type = Numeric
• In the Attributes group box, no boxes should be
checked
• Fixed Length = Unchecked
3. Click OK. The field has been defined and added to the
Fields list in the lower left corner.
Step 2: Setting the Design Settings

The Design Settings dialog box is where you control
parameters that affect how the form looks on your display.
You can control the transparency of the background form
image, OMR bubbles, gridlines, and grid definitions. You
can also control the spacing on the gridlines.
In this lesson, we will set the Design Settings to general

settings that will work for the remainder of the lessons.
User’s Guide 281

However, you should feel free to adjust them if there is

something you would like to see more clearly.
Procedure 1. Prepare for scanning a sheet by ensuring that the
Design Settings parameters are set correctly. Click on
Design Settings. The Design Settings dialog box
will appear.
2. Set the parameters to the following:
• Background Image = 50%

• OMR Bubbles = 100%
• Gridlines = 25%
• Grid Definitions = 100%
• Rulers and Gridlines = Cells / Timing Marks
3. Click Close to see the results of the new settings.
Step 3: Marking the Grid Region and Scanning a

Sheet
In this section, you will mark the grid region on the form
so that you can later define the grid using the OMR Tool.
You will also scan the form so that you are able to see on
282 ScanTools Plus

the screen the marks you made on the form. Scanning a

sheet for grid placement automatically removes the
background form images. We will restore them at the end
of this lesson.
Procedure 1. On a blank General Purpose Answer Sheet No.
221681, use a pencil to fill in the bubbles in the
corners of the grid. Mark the 0 and 9 responses in the
A and J columns of the Identification Number grid.
2. Select Document | Select... from the menu bar. The

Select Document dialog box will appear.
3. Click the Scan Sheet button. A message box asking if

it is OK to replace sheet 1 and remove the
background form images will appear.
4. Click Yes. The sheet is scanned. The background

form images are removed. And, timing mark and form
ID mark data from the scanned form is updated in the
Select Document window.
5. Click OK in the Select Document window. The grid

you placed in “Defining a Grid Using the Background
Form Image Method” is visible along with the four
marks you made in this lesson. Notice that the drop
User’s Guide 283

out colors used on the form are not visible as they

were when the background form image was in place.
NOTE: The image shown above is called a “synthesized

image” because it represents OMR data areas only
and is not a fully detailed representation of the
actual form scanned.
You have now successfully scanned a sheet for grid

placement. In the next lesson, you will place a grid on the
four corners you marked.
Step 4: Defining a Grid Using the Corners Method

In this section, you will define a grid using the corners that
you marked in the previous section.
Procedure 1. Ensure that the Ident field is highlighted in the Fields
list box in the lower left corner of the screen.

284 ScanTools Plus

• Type = Numeric
4. Starting in the upper right corner and moving to the

lower left corner, draw a grid including the four
corners for the Identification Number grid that you
marked in the previous section. Your grid should look
like the illustration shown below.
5. Associate the Identification Number grid with the

Ident field by clicking the Append button. Notice
that the Ident field is highlighted in the Fields list and
that the 10 character numeric grid has been added to
the Grids list.
User’s Guide 285

You have now successfully defined a grid using the

Corners Method and associated that grid with a field.
Next you will do some clean-up before moving on to the
next lesson.
Step 5: Restoring the 2216811.tif and 2216812.tif

Background Form Images
Procedure Next, you will re-load the background form images
provided with your ScanTools Plus software so that you
can define grids using the Background Form Image
Method in the remaining lessons.
1. Select Document | Select from the main menu bar.

The Select Document window appears.
2. Re-load the background form images as described in

steps 3 to 10 of “Step 2: Creating the New
Document and Adding the Background Form
Image” on page 266.
NOTE: The dialog box will be entitled Select Document
as opposed to New Document because you are
selecting the document rather than creating it.
You have now successfully restored the background form

image and are ready to go to the next lesson.
286 ScanTools Plus


• Learn how to collect date data using one field and five
grids.
• Associate grids of different types with a single field
with a Date type.
Terms Two Digit Response: A grid type that uses the decimal
characters 01 through 99.

as or longer than the field length generated by ScanTools
from the associated grids. When unchecked, the length of
the field is dynamically sized by ScanTools to contain the
data generated by the grid(s) associated with the field.
• date fields
• evaluate fields
when scoring.
Concept We will use the five grids listed below to collect data for
the field Birth Date. These grids will be associated with a
single field named Birthdate that is 8 characters long and
of type Date. All five grids will appear under the BIRTH
DATE data area on the General Purpose Answer Sheet
No. 221681.
• The grid for month (MO) will be defined as a

two-digit response grid. (A single row of bubbles will
represent the digits 01 to 12.)
• The first digit of the Day grid will be defined as a
User’s Guide 287

• The second digit of the Day grid will be defined as a

• The first digit of the Year grid will be defined as a
• The last three digits of the Year grid will be defined as
a numeric grid (0 to 9).
Procedure 1. Define a field called Birthdate as described in
“Defining a Field” on page 273. Use the following
settings:
• Name = Birthdate.
• Type = Date.
• In the Attributes field, be sure no boxes are checked.
• Check the Fixed Length option and set the field
length to 8 by typing an 8 in the text box.
2. Define grid 1 as described in “Defining a Grid

settings:
• Type = Two digit response

3. Click Append to associate grid 1 with the Birthdate

field.
4. Define grids 2 through 5 as described in “Defining a

Grid Using the Background Form Image
Method” on page 276. Click Append after defining
each grid. In the OMR Tool, use the following
settings for each of the grids:
• Type = Numeric
288 ScanTools Plus


You have now successfully defined the Birthdate field

complete with associated grids.
User’s Guide 289


• Create a translate table.

• Define a field and grid using a user-defined data type.
Terms Translate Table: A table used to store values for a
user-defined data type. For example, the translate table for
the type Gender that we will use in this lesson includes
Female and Male.
Concept The Gender grid offers the respondent two choices, F or
M. Marking one or the other writes the words Female or
Male to the data record.
Since Gender is not a standard data type available in

ScanTools Plus software, you will need to create a custom
data type by using a translate table.
Step 1: Defining a Translate Table

Procedure 1. In the upper left corner of the screen, click the
Translate button. The Translate Tool dialog box is
displayed.
2. Click the Add Table button in the top part of the

dialog box. The Add Translate Table dialog box is
displayed.
3. Type the name of the table in the Name field. For this
tutorial, type Gender.
290 ScanTools Plus

4. Click OK to close the Add Translate Table dialog

box.

the Add Entry button. The Translate Table Entry
NOTE: For an explanation of the Omit and Multiple
responses, consult the Help system.
6. The Response Position field is prefilled with 1,

string to assign to the first bubble in the grid. In the
Translate String: field, type Female.
7. Click OK.
8. Click the Add Entry button again. The Translate

Table Entry dialog box is displayed.
9. Now the Response Position field is prefilled with 2,

string to assign to the second bubble in the grid. In the
Translate String field, type Male.
User’s Guide 291

10. Click OK.

the Close button.
You have now successfully created a translate table of type

Gender. Gender will now be available in the Type
drop-down list in the OMR Tool for every document in
the application.
Step 2: Using a Translate Table When Defining a Field

and Grid
Procedure Use the following steps to define the Gender field and
grid in the document record:
1. Define the field as described in “Defining a Field”

on page 273. Use the following settings in the
Output Field Entry dialog box:
292 ScanTools Plus

• Name = Gender.
2. Click OK.

page 276. Use the following settings in the OMR
Tool:
• Type = Gender
NOTE: While the translate table entries are defined as
Male and Female, the grid will display only an M
and an F to denote the two response positions.

the screen to define the grid.
NOTE: Notice that the grid width in the Grids list is 6 to
accommodate the longest string which is Female.
You have now successfully defined a grid for a

user-defined data type.
User’s Guide 293


• Define a field for Grade or Education using the

technique learned in “Defining a Field” on page 273.
• Learn how to define a linked grid for the two columns
of responses.
Terms Linked Grids: Two or more separate grids that have a
continued set of response designators between them.
Concept In some cases, there is not enough room to put all
responses for a question in a single column or row. When
this occurs, use a linked grid to continue the responses
from one grid to the next.
Procedure 1. Define the Grade field as described in “Defining a
Field” on page 273. In the Output Field Entry
dialog box, use the following settings:
• Name = Grade.
• Type = Numeric.
2. Click OK.
3. Define the Grade or Education grid by first ensuring

that the field name is highlighted in the box in the
lower left corner of the screen.

5. In the OMR Tool dialog box, use the following

settings:
• Type = Two digit response
294 ScanTools Plus


6. Draw the first grid on top of the left column for the
Grade or Education data area. The numbers 1
through 8 will be placed.
7. In the OMR Tool dialog box, click the Add Link to

Grid button. Use the same settings as step 5 above
when placing the linked grid.
8. Draw the second grid on top of the right column in

the Grade or Education data area. The numbers 9
through 16 (although the “1” for the tens digit will not
appear) will be placed.
9. Associate the linked grids with the Education field by

clicking Append in the lower left corner of the screen.
You have now successfully defined linked grids and

associated them with a field that you defined.
User’s Guide 295


• Use Copy and Paste to define grids for the Items

field.
• Switch to the bottom sheet and continue grid
definition for the Items field.
Terms Clipboard: A place in your computer’s memory that an
item can be copied to and pasted from.
Ctrl+c: The keyboard shortcut for the Copy command.

Copy a grid to the Clipboard by typing a “c” while holding
the Ctrl key.
Ctrl+v: The keyboard shortcut for the Paste command.

Paste a grid from the Clipboard by typing a “v” while
holding the Ctrl key.
Concept The Clipboard is a Windows feature that can be used in
many Windows programs including ScanTools Plus. When
you have multiple grids that are the same size, you can
save time in defining them by copying, pasting, and
repositioning.
Even though the grids will appear to be the same on the

bottom sheet, we will not use the copy and paste
commands to place grids from the top to the bottom. This
is because the orientation of the grids switches when
moving from the top to the bottom.
Step 1: Defining the Items Field

displayed.

following settings:
296 ScanTools Plus

• Name = Items
• Type = 1-Digit
• Fixed Length = Unchecked
3. Click OK.
You have now successfully defined the Items field.
Step 2: Defining the Grid That Will Be Copied:

Procedure 1. Select (highlight) the Items field.

• Type = One digit response

4. Draw the grid on response positions 1 through 10.
User’s Guide 297

5. Click Append to associate the grid with the Items

field. Your grid should look like the one in the
illustration below.
You now have successfully defined the grid that will be

copied. Next you will copy this grid to other locations on
the form and append to a single field.
298 ScanTools Plus

Step 3: Copying and Pasting a Grid to Other Positions

Procedure 1. Click on the grid for response positions 1 through 10.
2. Click the Copy button or press Ctrl+C. The grid is

now no longer highlighted.
3. Ensure that the Items field in the Fields list and the
last grid placed in the Grids list are both highlighted.
This will ensure that the pasted grid will be placed in
the correct order in the Grids list.
4. Next, click the Paste button or press Ctrl+V The grid

over response positions 1 through 10 will turn pink.
This indicates that a grid has been pasted into that
position.
5. Click and hold down the left mouse button in the

center of the grid. Drag the grid so that it is positioned
directly over response positions 11 through 20 and
then release the mouse button. If you make a mistake,
simply click and drag until the grid is properly
positioned.
User’s Guide 299


field.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6, positioning the pasted grids

over the remaining response positions on the top
sheet. You must place each grid in order for the data
to be collected correctly. Don’t forget to click Append
after positioning each grid.
You have now successfully copied and pasted grids for

response positions 11 through 100. Next, we will do the
bottom sheet.
Step 4: Defining Grids on the Bottom Sheet

Defining grids on the bottom sheet is no different than
doing it on the top sheet. However, you need to resist the
temptation of copying grids from the top sheet to the
bottom sheet. If you do that, you will find that the
orientation of the grids you paste will not be correct.
Procedure 1. Click on the Go To Bottom button in the lower left
corner of the screen. The bottom sheet will appear.
NOTE: Notice that the grids have a different orientation

than those on the top side.
300 ScanTools Plus

2. Select (highlight) the Items field.

• Type = One digit response

• Orientation = Up
Notice that, on the top sheet, the orientation was

Down while, on the bottom sheet, the orientation is
Up.
5. Draw the grid on response positions 101 through 110.
User’s Guide 301


field. Your grid should look like the one in the
illustration below.
7. Copy the grid you just placed to the remaining

response positions using the method you learned in
“Step 3: Copying and Pasting a Grid to Other
Positions” on page 299. Be sure to:
• place the grids in order to ensure that the data is

collected correctly.
• click Append after placing each grid.
302 ScanTools Plus

When you are done, your bottom sheet should look

like the illustration below.
You have now successfully defined the grids for the Items
field on the bottom sheet.
User’s Guide 303


• Define a field for the Score of the General Purpose

Answer Sheet No. 221681
Terms 1- or 2- Digit Field Data Types: 1- or 2-Digit field data
types are required for items that will be scored. The items
to be scored must also be marked on the associated key
sheet. If you specify 1- or 2-Digit field data type for items
you do not wish to score, do not mark these items on a
key sheet.
Score: A number associated with the number of

responses on a scanned form that match the answer key.
Key Data: In scoring, the correct responses for a test.

Key data can be either in the form of a document filled in
with the correct responses or data files created using
correctly filled in documents that have been scanned.
Concept Up to this point, every field we created in the output
record has had one or more grids associated with it.
However, in this lesson, we will create a field that does not
have a grid associated with it. Instead, we will use the field
to store the value of the score of scanned forms.
Scoring can be done online, or as a post-scan activity that

is accessed through the main ScanTools window. The
ScanTools score module allows you to score multiple-
choice and true/false tests through the use of 1- or 2- digit
field data types. Scoring consists of determining correct
and incorrect responses by comparing the test data to key
data. The key data can be stored in the profile, or can be
scanned online.
The actual scoring process is beyond the scope of this

tutorial. The following describes how to set up the Score
field.
304 ScanTools Plus

1. In the lower left corner of the screen, click the New

displayed.

following settings:
• Name = Score
• Type = Numeric.
• Fixed Length = 6 for this example. A total score
requires a minimum of 5, and a subtest score requires
a minimum of 4.
3. Click OK. Score* is displayed in the field list in the

lower left corner. The asterisk indicates that it is a field
with no grids associated with it.
You have just successfully defined a field to store score

data.
User’s Guide 305


• Ready your application for scanning by checking

• Exit the Application Definition Module.
• Optional: Copy your work to removable media by
creating an application diskette.
Concept In this lesson, we will wrap up application definition. The
fields for the data file have been created. The grids have
been placed and associated with the appropriate fields. All
that remains is to release the application for scanning, and
, if desired, to copy the application to a removable media.
Procedure 1. When all fields and grids are defined, your application
is ready to be released for scanning. To do this, select
Application | Settings. The Application Settings
2. Check the Release for scanning check box so that

the application can be scanned.
3. Click OK to continue. You are returned to the

Application Definition Module.

5. Select Application | Exit to exit the Application
Definition Module.
6. To copy your application to removable media, select

Configure | Make Application Disk.... The Make
Application Disk dialog box appears.
7. Highlight your new application by selecting 700 -

Learning Document.
306 ScanTools Plus

8. To save all components of your application

(recommended), check all boxes in the Copy Input/
Configuration Files of Type and the Copy Output/
Produced Files of Type groups.
9. In the Copy To text box, enter the drive letter and

directory that you wish to copy the application to.
10. Click OK to continue. The Copy Application Files

dialog box appears.
11. All application files are selected. We recommend

copying them all. However, if desired, you can deselect
or reselect a file by simply clicking on it while holding
the Ctrl key.
12. When the files you wish to copy are selected, click the
Copy button to copy the files.
You have now successfully released your application for

scanning and copied your application to disk. That
concludes this tutorial.
User’s Guide 307


Talk with your Scantron representative about additional
training services and materials available or visit our Web
site at www.scantron.com.
Custom application development is available through the

Scantron Services Group by calling 1-800-338-5544.
308 ScanTools Plus

C
Appendix C:
Data File Format
Scanned data is formatted and stored in data files. The
files contain standard ASCII characters and can be viewed
with a text editor. Before scanning, you need to create and
select a data file using the ScanTools Plus Main window
Data File menu.
The New Data File dialog box enables you to enter the
name for a new data file.
A data file can have a long file name. The name can
include spaces but must not include any of the following
special characters:
: “ | < > ? / *
Also, valid DOS device names should not be used, such

as:
aux, com1, com2, com3, com4, con, lpt1, lpt2, lpt3
User’s Guide 309

Appendix C: Data File Format
Data files have the following characteristics:
• Each scanning task creates a file with the name you

specify and the extension .DAT. The file contains an
individual document record for each document
scanned.
• Each document record is a string of ASCII characters.
A carriage return/linefeed (CR/LF) is used to
terminate each record, and an end-of-file marker
(Ctrl-Z) is displayed after the last record.
• The first 40 characters of the string comprise the
NCS Header.
• The remaining characters of the string are
document data as defined in the application's
output format. When scanning multiple
documents that use record formats of different
lengths, each document record is padded with
spaces, if necessary, to make all records equal in
length to the longest record format.
• The NCS Header and each data item occupies a fixed
number of characters in a fixed position in the string.
This simple data format facilitates conversion of data files
to custom formats or importation to other databases.
The content of the NCS Header is described in online

help.
310 ScanTools Plus

D
Appendix D:
Glossary
A
application A set of rules that governs how your personal computer
collects data from your scanner and how it stores this
information on your disk. It contains one or more
document definitions and their associated output formats.
application module The software used to create an application consisting of
one or more documents. The application module has its
own set of menus separate from the ScanTools main
window. For details, see Application Module in online
help.
archiving Image archiving is the process of extracting individual
image clips and associated items from the master clip file
created during scanning, and writing the archival clips as
separate entities into a user-defined directory. It is a
process of rearranging clips and fields from data record
User’s Guide 311

Appendix D: Glossary
archive image scaling–background form image
into a format more comprehensible to some other

archiving software.
archive image scaling Located on the Application Settings dialog, this feature
is used to change the resolution of the scanned image
during archive. The archived image will be saved in the
selectedresolution (200 DPI, 240 DPI, 300 DPI, 400 DPI
or 600 DPI). For image scanners only.
B
background form image A color TIFF file that matches the printed form that will
be scanned. This file is used in application definition,
post-scan editing, and image archiving.
Ideally, the file should be supplied by the vendor who

printed the form. It should be in the same orientation as
the way the form is scanned and paper size should be the
same as the scanned form. For two-sided forms, top and
bottom side paper size must be identical. For best
performance, the TIFF file should be 16-color and have a
resolution of 150 - 400 dpi, with 400 providing the best
image quality.
If your forms vendor is unable to supply the file, you have

several options:
• If you use Scantron DesignExpert software with the

optional PrintFlex module to design your forms, you
can use the Export Background Form Image option
to create your own background form image. This file
is suitable for application definition, post-scan editing,
and image archiving.
• If you have a Scantron image scanner, you can scan
the form during application definition. This results in
a grayscale image of the non-dropout color elements
on the form. Elements in dropout color will not
appear in the file. This file is suitable for application
definition only.
312 ScanTools Plus

bar code–character
• If you have a flatbed color scanner, you can scan the

form to create a TIFF file. This file is suitable for
application definition only.
bar code A series of parallel lines and spaces of varying widths,
printed on a form, or affixed to a form with a label. When
decoded, a bar code represents a string of alphanumeric
characters.
batch A batch is a collection of sheets that are scanned, one after
another, as a group. You can assign a common batch
number to each sheet in a batch.
bias bar The EZData scanner requires that a bias bar be defined
for every sheet of every form. A bias bar is a row of 12
black cells and is used at scanning time to make certain the
scanner read head is functioning properly, before scanning
forms. The bias bar is on all printed forms used by the
EZData scanner. EZData scanners are single-sided
scanners so the bias bar is always on the top side of the
form.
booklet A document that contains more than one sheet.
booklet sequence check A booklet sequence check determines if sheets are being
scanned in proper order. Two types of booklet sequence
checks are available. The ascending sequence check
verifies that each sheet scanned has a higher sequence
number than the previous one. The sequential sequence
check verifies that each sheet scanned has a sequence
number one greater than the number of the previous
sheet. Both checks require the first and last sheets of a
booklet to be scanned.
C
character A character is: (1) A single letter, digit, or symbol, or (2)
the string of response positions on a form that is needed
to represent a single letter, digit, or symbol.
User’s Guide 313

configuration sheet–document definition
configuration sheet A configuration sheet is a special form used to configure a

scanner. When a completed configuration sheet is
scanned, it sets the communications protocol of the
scanner that scans it. Configuration sheets vary from
scanner to scanner, and not all scanners use them.
context All of the variables associated with a scanning task. It
includes the application, the data file, the edit profile, the
score profile, and the conversion profile.
context file An ASCII text file that allows you to start ScanTools Plus
software from the Run dialog box or to create your own
icon and command line to automate a particular
ScanTools Plus function.
conversion profile A set of rules that enables ScanTools Plus software to
convert a standard data file into one of a different format.
D
data file A computer file that contains data from scanned
documents.
dialog box A Microsoft Windows term for a box or window that is
displayed on your screen when ScanTools Plus software
needs more information to complete a task.
document One or more sheets, when scanned, produce one
document record in a data file. One document creates one
document record, and many documents can be in one
application.
document definition The part of an application that defines where information
is located on a document. It governs how the computer
handles the information from data the scanner provides.
The definition includes number of sheets in the
document, location of form ID marks, timing marks, and
skew marks, location and types of grids, and which field
the data from each grid will be stored in.
314 ScanTools Plus

document record–edit profile
document record A part of a data file that represents the information

obtained from one document.
document sequence record The part of an application that defines the order in which
to scan the documents.
domain resolution An output field attribute that causes the field's grids to be
resolved (scanned and translated into data) using a read
level threshold that is based on the average read level of all
marks in the field's grids. Basing the read level threshold
on the actual darkness of the marks in the field ensures
that fields with marks that are especially dark (on average)
are resolved.
When applying domain resolution to a grid using binary

resolution (binary, binary coded decimal, or litho-code),
domain resolution is performed on a single grid within the
field rather than on the average of all marks in all grids in
the field (as all other resolution types do). When you use
domain resolution, the read levels for all of the marks in
the field are averaged. If there are more than 15 marks, the
read level threshold is set at the average read level minus 4
for OpScan scanners.
If there are less than 15 marks, the read level threshold is

set at the average read level minus 5 for OpScan scanners.
The read level threshold is never lowered (as a result of
using domain resolution) below what it would be if you
did not use domain resolution. It can only be raised.
Marks that have read levels less than the read level
threshold are interpreted as omits.
NOTE: The EZData scanner does not support domain
resolution.
E
edit profile A set of rules used to determine whether data collected
from scanning is valid, and what to do if it isn't.
User’s Guide 315

field–graybox (ICR/OCR)
F
field A portion of a document record that is reserved for one
piece of information.
file A file is a collection of records that contain related
information stored on disk and retrieved from disk at the
same time.
file bar The area of the scanning module main window which
allows you to select the current context for the action you
are performing. You can select the desired application,
data file, and appropriate profile. The display of the file
bar is controlled from the main window Options, File Bar
menu.
file format The format of a file specifies the manner in which data is
internally represented in it. ScanTools Plus gives you the
ability to convert files to a number of standard formats
that are used by other software packages.
form A sheet(s) of paper on which data is gathered and can be
scanned. The sheet(s) contains Form ID Marks and timing
marks, and it complies with dimensional restrictions
imposed by the scanner.
form ID marks Small black rectangles at the top of the form that uniquely
identify it. ScanTools Plus requires that each sheet in an
application has a unique form ID mark.
G
graybox (ICR/OCR) A defined region of a form that is evaluated for the
presence of data, for recognition of machine printed and
hand printed text, and for archiving of the associated
image clip. It is defined in a ScanTools Plus application
using the Graybox tool and requires installation of the
optional RealTime Character Recognition component for
implementation.
316 ScanTools Plus

graybox (standard)–ICR/OCR
graybox (standard) A defined region of a form that is evaluated for the

presence of data and for archiving of the associated image
clip. It is defined in a ScanTools Plus application using the
Graybox tool. Standard grayboxes are commonly used in
applications that require key from image for data capture.
grid One or more response position strings on a form that,
together, represent one piece of information. The
following grid types are available in ScanTools Plus:
• Alphanumeric
• Bar code
• BCD - binary-coded decimal
• Binary
• Binary (scoring)
• Binary with Parity
• Graybox
• Literal
• Litho-code
• Numeric
I
ICR/OCR Intelligent Character Recognition/Optical Character
Recognition (for image scanners only). The interpretation
of both hand printed and machine printed letters and
numbers. ICR is also called Handprint Recognition. See
documentation for the optional RealTime Character
Recognition component for additional information,
including application definition for character recognition
and formatting handprint and machine print areas for best
results.
User’s Guide 317

image clip–iNAME Merge
image clip A photographic representation of all or a portion of a

scanned sheet created as a TIF (tagged image file format)
or JPG image file. You define image clips in the
application module as part of an application definition of a
document. Image clips can be used in the following ways:
• You can use them in the data editor to resolve edit

failures without needing to access the paper-scanned
sheets.
• They can be archived for viewing by another program
at a later date.
• They can be interpreted by the optional RealTime
Character Recognition component for recognition of
machine printed and hand printed text.
image header field An optional block of data after the NCS Header in the
document record. The image header field can only be used
by ScanTools Plus Link SDK and is used for image
scanner applications only. When an image scanner is used
and the application definition includes image clipping, the
image header field provides information about the
location and quantity of clips for each document scanned.
See Add/Remove Image Header Fields in online help.
iNAME image archiving iNAME is a ScanTools software function that enables you
to perform scan-time image archiving. This includes
archiving of image files created during scanning,
user-defined archive file and path naming, indexing, and
control of which fields to archive. iNAME configuration
is integrated with ScanTools application definition.
iNAME Merge iNAME Merge is a post-scan function that is run after
iNAME image archiving is complete. It lets you merge a
background form image into the individual image files
that were generated by iNAME archiving. It also lets you
rotate images, and change the image scaling to a different
resolution than what was produced at scan-time.
318 ScanTools Plus

key–mark all that apply field
K
key The actual data that the sheet (data) is scored against.
key data In scoring, the correct responses for a test. Key data can
be either in the form of a document filled in with the
correct responses or data files created when the correctly
filled in documents have been scanned.
key from image Key from Image (KFI) literally means looking at an image
and keying in the characters.
L
linked grids Two or more non-contiguous grids can be defined as one
grid by using the OMR tool Add Link to Grid button.
After defining one grid, you can continue the grid in
another location on the same sheet by pressing the button
and defining another grid. The grids can be on the same
side of a single sheet or they can span the front and back
of a single sheet. They cannot span across multiple sheets.
Linked grids must be of the same type and output length;
however, the grid spacing can be different.
literal A character or string that is always written to every
document record. It is created in a ScanTools Plus
application using the Literal tool.
litho-code A litho-code is an optional, binary-coded serial number
unique to every form. They are pre-printed grids that are
used to check that all sheets in a booklet are from the
same individual document.
M
mark all that apply field An output field attribute that allows data collection from a
single grid where two or more response positions can be
marked. Each response is translated to one or more
characters defined in a translate table.
User’s Guide 319

mark all that apply field (left justify)–mod 10 edit
The output field for the grid contains both characters

from the translate table for marked responses and spaces
for responses not marked, in the order defined in the
translate table. The number of characters included for
each response position is based on the length of the
largest character string in the translate table.
mark all that apply field An output field attribute that allows data collection from a
(left justify) single grid where two or more response positions can be
marked. Each response is translated to one or more
characters defined in a translate table.
The output field for the grid contains both characters

from the translate table for marked responses and spaces
for responses not marked. The character strings for
marked responses are left justified within the field. The
field is space-filled on the right for responses not marked.
The number of characters included for each response
position is based on the length of the largest character
string in the translate table.
mark all that apply grid A type of grid where it is acceptable for any number (all
through none) of response positions to be marked. It is
commonly used for surveys. The grid must be a single
column or a single row. If your application requires “Mark
All That Apply” data collection, we recommend using the
Mark All That Apply or Mark All That Apply (Left Justify)
output field attribute types, see above. The output field
attributes provide more features and are easier to
implement than the Mark All That Apply grid method.
mark threshold The mark threshold defines how dark a mark must be
before it is “seen” by the scanner. The mark threshold
may be varied using the ScanTools Plus application.
mod 10 edit In an edit profile, an edit type that is usually used to check
the validity of data collected from a grid. It checks the
completeness of data and then applies a special checksum
test. The checksum test is useful to make sure that no
digits in the field have been transposed and that no single
digits have been misread.
320 ScanTools Plus

multiple–OMR from Scanner
multiple A multiple is when more than one response position in a

response position string has been marked. Multiples are
indicated in records by an asterisk (*).
N
NCS Header A block of data at the beginning of every document
record that identifies it.
O
omit An omit is when no response positions have been marked
in a response position string. Omits are indicated in
records by a space.
OMR - Optical Mark Optical Mark Recognition (OMR) is the process of
Recognition machine recognition of pencil or pen marks on a page and
the production of a text data file output. The technology
supports multiple choice questions, surveys, and mark-all-
that-apply questions using defined grids of bubble
response positions. Unlike “mark sense” software, the
OMR solution not only determines which marks have
been filled in by the respondent, but is able to distinguish
the intended response when more than one bubble has
been marked. This is important in applications like test
scoring where erasures may appear as dark marks and be
incorrectly scored.
OMR from Image In ScanTools Plus Application Settings, an option that
creates OMR data from a scanned image that is stored in
the buffer in the memory of the personal computer
attached to the scanner; the image is accessed by
ScanTools Plus software. When the configured scanner is
an OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150, 5000i, iNSIGHT 20, or
iNSIGHT 30, this is always used.
OMR from Scanner In ScanTools Plus Application Settings, an option that
allows OMR data to be created in the scanner and sent to
ScanTools Plus software in ASCII format. Transmitting
ASCII data is faster than transmitting an image. This
User’s Guide 321

online edit correction–preslug
option is faster than OMR from Image when Enable

Image = No Image or Top Only in the Application
Settings dialog. This is an option for the OpScan
iNSIGHT 2/4 scanner with imaging.
online edit correction A scanning option that lets you correct failing document
records while the scanner is scanning the forms. This
requires that an edit profile be selected at scanning time.
ScanTools Plus does not display an image clip during
online edit correction.
output field The part of a document record that contains a discrete
data item.
output format A collection of output fields and associated grids for a
document. An output format is required for each
document; it is defined and selected in a document in the
application. The output format provides a way to define
individual output fields, order them in the sequence you
need, and associate them with grids.
P
path A path specifies a file's logical location on disk. It consists
of the disk drive designation, one or more directory
names, the file name, and the file extension. Its format is:
\Parentdirectory\subdirectory\filename.ext.
phantom clips For image scanners only. Phantom clips are empty image
clips taken to provide targeting for post-scan editing.
Phantom clipping is used extensively to provide cueing for
the data editor. Every response row/column in every
clipped grid and every resolved character in every ICR/
OCR graybox is represented by a phantom clip. If desired,
phantom clipping can be disabled from the Advanced
Configuration dialog box.
preslug Pre-printing of responses in OMR grids, often in black
ink, so they can be read by the scanner. This is typically
done on the form before it is given to the respondent. In a
ScanTools Plus application, preslug resolution is an output
322 ScanTools Plus

PrintFlex–response position string
field attribute that compensates for light pre-slugged

marks on a grid. In a ScanTools Plus edit profile, preslug is
a completeness checking type that compensates for light
pre-slugged marks. Preslug resolution and preslug
completeness edit cannot be used for grid types: Binary,
Binary with Parity, Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) or
Litho-code.
PrintFlex An optional Scantron DesignExpert software module
that, with a PostScript laser printer, enables you to print
OMR forms on plain paper. These forms can be scanned
with ScanTools Plus with the optional ScanFlex module
and a Scantron OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150, 5000i,
iNSIGHT 20, iNSIGHT 30, or OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4
(with Imaging) scanner.
R
RealTime Character An optional ScanTools Plus module that, with a Scantron
Recognition OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150, 5000i, iNSIGHT 20,
iNSIGHT 30, or OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 (with Imaging)
scanner, enables you to scan and recognize machine
printed and hand printed text.
record A record is a collection of fields that contain related
information and are treated as a unit for data processing
purposes. For example, a record might contain the fields
Name, Age, Occupation, and Address where the
information in these fields applies to the same person.
record format A record format specifies how fields and character
constants are arranged as part of a record.
response position A response position is a circle or oval that can be marked
(“filled-in”) on a form to represent information. A
response position is sometimes called a “bubble.”
response position string The set of response positions on a form that are used to
represent a single character. Usually no more than one
response position in a string may be marked.
User’s Guide 323

run number–sheet thickness
run number The run number is a user-specified number that identifies

a set of documents that are scanned together in the same
scanning run.
S
ScanFlex An optional ScanTools Plus module that, with a Scantron
OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150, 5000i, iNSIGHT 20,
iNSIGHT 30, or OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 (with Imaging)
scanner, enables you to scan OMR forms manufactured
using a wide variety of printing technologies, and printed
on plain paper.
ScanFlex alignment guide A clear plastic tool that enables you to test your OMR
forms to verify that they can be processed with ScanTools
Plus with ScanFlex software. The ScanFlex Alignment
Guide is provided with both ScanTools Plus with
ScanFlex and Scantron DesignExpert with PrintFlex
software products.
scanner mark threshold See mark threshold.
score profile A set of rules used by ScanTools Plus software to score
the data collected during scanning, or later when scoring is
performed on a data file.
sheet A single piece of paper on which data has been entered
(can be one side or both sides). Documents can be
composed of more than one sheet.
sheet thickness Scanners support forms which vary in thickness
(measured by weight and thousandths of an inch).
Knowing the thickness of the form is important when
adjusting the scanner's feed mechanism. A feed
mechanism that is not set correctly may result in either
double-sheet picking or slippage. Adjusting sheet
thickness to the correct setting is scanner dependent.
In ScanTools Plus applications, you can define the

expected thickness of each sheet in a document.
324 ScanTools Plus

skew marks–test
NOTE: The EZData scanner does not support sheet

thickness checking.
skew marks The small black ovals printed on a sheet that provide
additional skew detection to the scanning software. They
are designed to detect paper stretch problems due to lack
of proper paper conditioning or other reasons. Skew
marks are optional. In ScanTools applications, you define
the skew mark locations on each side of each sheet.
sticky field An output field attribute that causes the content of the
field to be written to all subsequent document records (it
“sticks” in the field) until replaced by another document
record using this field. This enables you to mark output
records in batches of documents.
subtest A grouping of questions on a test. Groupings are typically
organized by the subject, theme, or learning objective the
group is being used to test.
summation field An output field attribute where the data from a grid is
created by summing the numerical values of all marked
responses. Each response is translated to a numerical value
(character string) defined in a translate table. Two or more
response positions can be marked, allowing numerical
values to be entered with a minimum of response
positions. The grid for a summation field must be a single
column or a single row.
T
tally field An output field attribute that causes ScanTools to collect
information about the mark quality of the grid
corresponding to this field. Data from this and other tally
fields are used by ScanTools to calculate a Worst Mark
Intensity Factor (WMIF) and Invalid Response Count
(IRC) for the document. These figures are written in the
NCS Header of the document record.
test A form used to mark choices from among alternative
answers to test questions. A test typically consists of
User’s Guide 325

thresholding–translate
several questions, which require responses from the test

taker by marking or filling in small circles (bubbles, ovals,
or rectangles) representative of the response of their
choice for each question.
thresholding Determining the proper point for converting grayscale
images to black and white in order to get the optimum
bitone images. This can be done by either manual
adjustment or automatic means. The Dynamic Threshold
feature, also known as HAPI (Histogrammic Adjustment
Per Image), allows the image scanner and ScanTools
software to provide automated thresholding that will
cover a wide variety of forms without requiring human
intervention to gain the optimum thresholding point. For
image scanners only.
timing track (timing A row of black rectangles along the edge of a form that
marks) enable the scanner to locate response positions.
translate Each position in a response grid is translated to one or

more characters defined in a translate table in the
ScanTools Plus application. The following are system
translate tables provided in every ScanTools Plus
application:
• Alphanumeric
• Numeric
By design, every translate table name is displayed as a Type

in the OMR tool in all documents within the application.
Using the translate tool, you can create your own custom
translate tables in addition to the ones provided by
ScanTools Plus software. You can also import translate
tables from a different application into the currently open
application.
326 ScanTools Plus

transport printer–UNC
transport printer A hardware option on some scanners that enables data to

be printed on a form while it is being scanned.
U
UNC Universal Naming Convention or Uniform Naming
Convention. A UNC path name is one that starts with
“\\server name” rather than with a mapped drive letter.
UNC paths specify the name of a particular computer and
a particular directory or resource to be accessed. The
name of the computer is prefaced with two backslashes,
while the directory or resource is prefaced with one. For
example, \\SERVER1\VOL1.
For iNAME image archiving and iNAME Merge, write

privileges to the root of the UNC path are required if
UNC directory paths are specified in the iNAME
configuration. Either the application user running the
iNAME operation must have these write privileges or
power user privileges must be included in the iNAME
configuration. See online help.
User’s Guide 327

UNC–UNC
NOTES
328 ScanTools Plus

I
Index
Numerics archiving, see image archiving

1- or 2- digit field data types . . . . . . . . . 248, 304 associating a grid with a field . . . . . . . . . 207, 279
801 sample application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185, 257 automatically edit a data file . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
A B
action bar, ScanTools Plus window . . . . . . . .99 background form image 176, 192, 208, 268, 280
Add Table button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 290 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190, 266
Add Translate Table dialog box . . . . . . 228, 290 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189, 257, 312
alignment background merging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
guide (ScanFlex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Bar Code Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
image archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 bar code, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
alphabetic (no space), OMR grid type . . . . . . . 76 batch, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
alphanumeric, OMR grid type . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 BCD (binary coded decimal), OMR grid type 77
Append command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 279 bias bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 313
application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 binary (scoring), OMR grid type . . . . . . . . . . . 78
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187, 264 binary with parity, OMR grid type . . . . . . . . . 78
defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 binary, OMR grid type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 binary-coded decimal, OMR grid type . . . . . . 77
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 bitone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 booklet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195, 271 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 sequence check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 195, 271 C
application disk, making . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 change edit profile values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
application module, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 character, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Application Settings dialog box . . . . . . . 187, 264 checking image orientation . . . . . . . . . . 189, 265
Archive Image Scaling radio buttons . . . . . . 312 clip attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
archiving image clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155–156 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
User’s Guide 329

Index
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 corrections, making . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Clip Attributes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 creating a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 189, 265
clip images of failed fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 creating an application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187, 264
clip region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 application options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 application settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 custom application development/service . .
enlarged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 252, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
for linked grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 296 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
clipping start application definition . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
sparse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 creating an output format . . . . . . . . 86, 194, 270
whole sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Ctrl+c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 296
Clipping Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Ctrl+v . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 296
Combine with Form check box . . . . . . . . . . . 218 custom application development . . . . . 252, 308
comments field and grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 customer support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
communications errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 cutoff value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
configuration settings
scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 D
setting directories (paths) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 data editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
configuration sheet, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 data file
configuring the context defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
file bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
scanning options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 data type, user defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 290
confirmations, application option . . . . . . . . . . 79 date field, defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 287
context file, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 defining
context, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 a clip region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
conversion profile a clip region for linked grids . . . . . . . . . 235
change parameter values . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 a date field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 287
create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 a field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 201, 273
create a copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 a grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 a grid using copy and paste . . . . . . 237, 296
modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 a grid using the background form image
output formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 276
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 a grid using the outline method . . . 211, 284
window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 a score field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 304
converting data a translate table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 290
changing parameter values . . . . . . . . . . . 152 linked grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233, 294
conversion profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 deleting an application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
conversion profile window . . . . . . . . . . 148 Delimited ASCII (.DLM, .TXT, or .CSV), output
converting an existing data file . . . . . . . 153 formats for converted data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
creating a conversion profile . . . . . . . . . 150 designator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 276
field delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 DesignExpert
header record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
modifying a conversion profile . . . . . . . 150 software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 174
output formats for converted files . . . . . 143 dialog box, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 display field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 273
post-scan converting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189, 257
record delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 189, 265
text envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Copy command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 296 definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 314
330 ScanTools Plus

Index
importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 defining a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 201, 273

record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
sequence record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 field data types
domain resolution, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 scoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 304
DOSSIER (.DSA or .DSE), output formats for file
converted data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 316
dropout colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208, 280 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
E File Name Suffix text box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
edit correction dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Fix Light Background Images . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
edit corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 fixed length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 221, 273, 287
edit profile Fixed Length Records (.SDF), output formats for
change values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 converted data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
changing edit profile values . . . . . . . . . . 116 flag failed records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
creating a copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Flip Image/Booklet Page check box . . 191, 267
creating a new edit profile . . . . . . . . . . . 117 For . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 form
modify an existing edit profile . . . . . . . . 115 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Edit Selected Grid button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
editing a specific document record . . . . . . . . 124 form ID marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
editing data defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189, 265, 316
clip images of failed fields . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Form ID Matching option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
creating a new edit profile . . . . . . . 110, 117 formula scoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
edit profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 full sheet image archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
editing a specific document record . . . . 124
flag failed records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 G
making corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 General Purpose Answer Sheet . . . . . . 184, 254
manually editing a data file . . . . . . . 111, 124 glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Modify Data File window . . . . . . . . . . . 124 graybox
modifying an existing edit profile . 110, 115 (ICR/OCR), defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 (standard), defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
post-scan editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 119 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
print a message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
reject failed records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Graybox ICR/OCR Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
selecting a data file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 grayscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
selecting the failing sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 grid
starting the edit cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 clip region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
stop on failing field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 defined . . . . . . . . . . 201, 204, 273, 276, 317
using an edit profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 defining a . . . . . . . . . 87, 204, 211, 276, 284
Enable Background Fix check box . . . . . . . . 198 defining using copy and paste . . . . 237, 296
Enable Black Removal check box . . . . . . . . . 198 OMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 276
enlarged clip region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 grid types, OMR
error, scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 alphabetic, no space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
alphanumeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
F binary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
failed fields, clip images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 binary (scoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
features of a form (sheet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 binary with parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
field binary-coded decimal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 273, 316 Litho-code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
numeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
User’s Guide 331

Index
one-digit response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 software component selection . . . . . . . . . 40
two-digit response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
guide edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 K
key
H data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
header record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 from image (KFI) . . . . . . . 74, 197, 244, 319
help
calling for customer support . . . . . . . . . . 12 L
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 leading edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
linked grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233, 294
I defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233, 294, 319
IBM 3881 (.ASC or .EBC), output formats for literal
converted data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
ICR/OCR, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
image litho-code
header field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
orientation, checking . . . . . . . . . . . 189, 265 OMR grid type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191, 266
image archiving M
alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 making
application definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
background merging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 making an application disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 manually editing a data file . . . . . . 111, 113, 124
directory path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 mark all that apply
full sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
iNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 field (left justify) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 mark style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 276
image clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 197 mark threshold, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 menu bar, ScanTools Plus window . . . . . . . . . 99
for grids, bar codes, and grayboxes . . . . . 74 merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Image Clips dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 metric units for paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
importing Microsoft Visual Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 migrating
DesignExpert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 applications from earlier versions of
iNAME ScanTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
see also image archiving from ScanTools (16-bit Windows) . . . . . 29
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 161 from ScanTools II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
image archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 318 from ScanTools II, DOS environment . . 29
iNAME Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162, 318 mod 10 edit, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
application definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 modify
installing an application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 an existing application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
installing ScanTools Plus an existing edit profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
auto-start issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Modify Data File window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 moving between records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
license key entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 multiple, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
332 ScanTools Plus

Index
N guarantee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
navigation during editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 print a message about failed fields . . . . . . . . 114
NCS Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 PrintFlex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 174
defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
New Data File dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 guarantee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
New Document window . . . . . . . . . . . . 193, 269 printing forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
New Output Format dialog . . . . . . . . . . 194, 270 printing online help topics, help
numeric, OMR grid type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 printing topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
O R
omit, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 read controls, application option . . . . . . . . . . 80
OMR RealTime Character Recognition . 2, 33, 49, 69,
from image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 73, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 323
from scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 record delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 276 record format, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
grid types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 record, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
OMR Tool dialog box . . . 71, 204, 211, 276, 284 registering the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
one digit response, OMR grid type . . . . . . . . . 78 registration, online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
online edit correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 322 reject failed records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
optical mark recognition (OMR) Release for scanning check box . . . . . . 250, 306
defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Remove Black from Background . . . . . . . . . 198
forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 removing ScanTools Plus software . . . . . . . . . 49
orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 276 Replace button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
outline method (for defining a grid) . . . 211, 284 response position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Output Field Entry dialog box . . . 202, 274, 281 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
output field, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 response position string, defined . . . . . . . . . 323
output format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 270 rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191, 199, 266
application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 run number, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 S
definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 sample application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185, 257
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 saving the application . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 195, 271
saving to disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
P Scan Sheet button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208, 280
paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 ScanFlex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 173, 324
parts of an application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 alignment guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 324
Paste command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 296 background form images . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
path, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
phantom clips, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
plain paper printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 guarantee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170, 177
post-scan archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 printing forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 scanner configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
post-scan editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 119 scanner mark threshold, see mark threshold
automatically editing a data file . . . . . . . 120 scanning a sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208, 280
selecting edit options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 scanning documents
user exits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 configuring the context . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
post-scan scoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 180 edit correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
preslug, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 edit errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
PrinFlex overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
User’s Guide 333

Index
procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 sequence, application option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

scanner errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 setting clip attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
ScanTools Plus window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 sheet
scanning user exits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
scan-time archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 thickness, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
see also image archiving Sheet Image Diagnostic tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
ScanTools Plus sheet, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
calling for help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 skew marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 103, 325
capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 sparse clipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 199
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 SPSS for Windows (.SPS and .DA1), output
converting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 formats for converted data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
creating an application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 starting the edit cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
data file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 sticky field, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
FAQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 stop the scanner on a failing field . . . . . . . . . 114
glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 subtest, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 summation field, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
migrating earlier applications . . . . . . . . . . 25 support, web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
modifying an application . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 supported scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 system, ScanTools help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 systems requirements, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
system requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
uninstall (removal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 T
upgrading from earlier versions . . . . . . . . 22 tally field, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Scantron DesignExpert test, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 text envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 174 thresholding, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
score field, defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 304 timing marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 189, 265, 326
score profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 timing track, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 training services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 308
create a copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 translate
defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 324 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 OMR grid type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 translate table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 290
score, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 304 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 290
scoring an existing data file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 290
scoring data Translate Tool dialog box . . . . . . . . 74, 228, 290
changing parameter values . . . . . . . . . . . 136 transport printer, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
creating a score profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 tutorial
field data types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 304 image scanner application . . . . . . . 183, 253
modifying a score profile . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 254
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 two digit response
post-scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 287
score profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 OMR grid type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
score profile window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
selecting
a data file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 U
an output format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 UNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
edit options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Undo Grid Definition button 206, 212, 278, 285
the failing sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 uninstalling ScanTools Plus software . . . . . . . 49
334 ScanTools Plus

Index
upgrading from earlier versions of ScanTools 22 W

user defined data type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 290 web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
user exits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 whole sheet clipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 199
development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 window, ScanTools Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
development service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 179 Y
post-scan editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Y2K Compliant (.Y2K), output formats for
post-scan scoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 converted data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
User’s Guide 335

Index
NOTES
336 ScanTools Plus

®
Scantron Corporation
Toll free: (800) 338-5544
www.scantron.com
©2008-2009 Copyright Scantron Corporation. All rights reserved.

Publication Number 203 583 133

ScanTools Plus User&#39;s Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ScanTools Plus User&#39;s Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

®

Publication Number 203 583 133

5000i, DOSSIER, EZData, Image ScanTools, iNAME, iNSIGHT, OpScan, OpScan

Adaptec and USB2connect are trademarks of Adaptec, Inc.

PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United

Belkin is a registered trademark of Belkin Corporation.

D-Link and DUB-C2 are registered trademarks of D-Link Systems, Inc.

Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.

SIIG is a registered trademark of SIIG, Inc.

SPSS is a registered trademark and SPSS/PC+ is a trademark of SPSS, Inc.

Upgrading/Migrating Applications from Earlier

Registering the Software

Using Online Help

Calling for Help

READ ME FIRST! iii

System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Upgrading/Migrating Applications from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Software. . . iii

Registering the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Using Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Calling for Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Document Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii

Calling for Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Support Web Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Registering the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Using Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Upgrading from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Before You Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Installing ScanTools Plus Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Removing (Uninstalling) ScanTools Plus Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

ScanTools Plus Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

User’s Guide vii

Creating a ScanTools Plus Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Making an Application Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Parts of the ScanTools Plus Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Configuring the Context. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

viii ScanTools Plus

Task Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Modifying an Existing Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Creating a New Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Post-Scan Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Manually Editing Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Task Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Score Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

The Score Profile Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Modify or Create a Score Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Changing Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Scoring an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Scoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Task Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Conversion Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Output Formats for Converted Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

The Conversion Profile Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Modify or Create a Conversion Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Changing Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Converting an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Converting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

iNAME Scan-Time Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

iNAME Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Post-Scan Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Scanner Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

ScanFlex Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

ScanFlex Alignment Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Forms Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Printing Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

ScanFlex/PrintFlex Guarantee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

ScanTools Plus User's Guide

ScanTools Plus User's Guide